1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
165 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
166 \author 34634807 "Jean-Pierre"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
179 by the \SpecialChar LyX
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
187 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
188 Documentation mailing list:
189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
191 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
213 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
217 \begin_inset Note Note
220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
221 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
222 \begin_inset Newline newline
227 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
235 \begin_layout Standard
236 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
237 LatexCommand tableofcontents
244 \begin_layout Chapter
248 \begin_layout Section
249 What is \SpecialChar LyX
253 \begin_layout Standard
255 is a document preparation system.
256 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
257 scripts, publishable books, business
258 letters and proposals,
259 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
263 It is unlike most other
264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
273 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
289 pt type, left justified, 5
290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
299 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
303 \begin_layout Standard
304 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
309 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
313 \begin_layout Standard
318 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
319 's philosophy: most importantly,
320 the format of all of the manuals.
321 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
322 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
323 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
326 \begin_layout Section
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
333 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
335 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
336 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
342 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
343 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
345 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
346 only a vertical scrollbar.
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
351 The first case is large images.
352 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
353 the image and use the option
364 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
367 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
372 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
380 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
387 \begin_layout Section
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
394 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
396 Just select the manual you want to read from the
403 \begin_layout Section
404 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
408 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
415 \begin_layout Standard
416 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
417 can be configured via the menu
419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
423 \begin_inset Index idx
426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
433 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
436 packages are available.
437 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
439 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
440 was installed on your system,
441 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
446 \begin_inset space \space{}
449 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
450 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
452 To force \SpecialChar LyX
453 to re-inspect your system use
455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
459 \begin_inset Index idx
462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
469 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
470 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
473 \begin_layout Section
476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
478 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
487 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 installed but you will not be
490 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
491 or print your documents
495 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
496 Some \SpecialChar LyX
497 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 which can produce PDFs and the like.
509 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
514 every \SpecialChar LyX
515 document can still be output as plain text
516 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
522 \begin_layout Standard
523 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
529 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
530 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
533 \begin_layout Standard
534 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
535 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
536 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
539 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
547 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
548 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
555 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
574 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
578 \begin_layout Chapter
579 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
583 \begin_layout Section
584 Basic File Operations
585 \begin_inset Index idx
588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
597 \begin_layout Standard
602 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
603 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
606 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
644 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
650 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
684 \begin_layout Itemize
686 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
698 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
714 \begin_layout Itemize
716 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
724 \begin_layout Itemize
746 \begin_layout Itemize
758 arg "buffer-write-as"
762 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
766 \begin_layout Itemize
768 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
780 \change_inserted 34634807 1620202805
784 \begin_layout Itemize
786 \change_inserted 34634807 1620202811
794 \begin_layout Itemize
808 \begin_layout Itemize
822 \begin_layout Standard
823 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
824 few minor differences.
827 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
838 command lists the available templates.
839 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
840 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
841 and possibly propose text fragments
843 for the document, features
844 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
847 you would otherwise need to
848 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
850 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
854 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
858 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
866 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
873 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
877 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
885 \begin_layout Standard
886 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
918 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
919 to open a file or create a new one, that big
920 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
924 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
928 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
939 \begin_layout Standard
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
966 people work on the same document at the same time.
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
971 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
974 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
979 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
980 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
982 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
984 \begin_inset Flex Emph
987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
989 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
990 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
999 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1004 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1012 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1032 will reload the document from disk.
1033 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1034 and want to restore it to the last save
1035 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1042 \begin_inset space ~
1047 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1048 them as your changes.
1051 \begin_layout Section
1052 Basic Editing Features
1053 \begin_inset Index idx
1056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1065 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1072 \begin_layout Standard
1073 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1074 can perform cut and paste operations
1075 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1076 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1077 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1078 editing features and how to access
1080 We will start with cut and paste.
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1084 As you might expect, the
1088 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1089 various other editing features.
1090 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1094 \begin_layout Itemize
1100 \begin_inset Index idx
1103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1132 \begin_layout Itemize
1138 \begin_inset Index idx
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1170 \begin_layout Itemize
1176 \begin_inset Index idx
1179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1204 \begin_layout Itemize
1208 \begin_inset space ~
1214 \begin_layout Itemize
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1224 \begin_layout Itemize
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1232 \begin_inset space ~
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1250 \begin_inset Index idx
1253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1268 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1278 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1284 \begin_layout Standard
1285 The first three are self-explanatory.
1286 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1287 and other programs using
1308 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1309 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1314 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1315 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1316 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1317 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1318 into individual cells.
1322 \begin_inset space ~
1327 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1328 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1332 \begin_layout Standard
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1341 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1343 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1358 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1359 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1360 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1366 \begin_inset space \space{}
1369 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1370 text which is often meaningless.)
1373 \begin_layout Standard
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1380 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1390 \begin_inset space ~
1399 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1400 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1401 is inserted as one paragraph.
1402 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1411 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1412 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1418 \begin_inset space ~
1421 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1427 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1438 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1441 paste from the primary selection.
1442 This is normally the currently selected text.
1445 \begin_layout Standard
1448 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1472 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1474 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1478 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1481 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1486 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1489 \begin_inset space ~
1500 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1502 \begin_inset space ~
1506 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1508 \begin_inset space ~
1516 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1530 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1534 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1538 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1542 \begin_inset space ~
1554 arg "word-find-backward"
1557 shortcut) to search backwards
1561 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1562 Even if you close the widget,
1571 arg "word-find-backward"
1574 will search further.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1581 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1586 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1589 \begin_inset space ~
1594 field and searches the next match.
1600 \begin_inset space ~
1605 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1607 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1609 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1613 \begin_layout Standard
1615 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1616 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1628 \begin_inset space ~
1634 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1637 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1638 If the toggle is set, searching for
1639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1650 will not match the word
1651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1664 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1668 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1675 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1679 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1684 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1685 to only find complete words, e.
1686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1690 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1719 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1723 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1731 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1734 \begin_layout Itemize
1737 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1742 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1754 \begin_layout Itemize
1756 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1761 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1762 been reached without asking.
1763 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1764 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1765 so you need to put it back manually.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 \paragraph_spacing single
1771 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1772 The widget also has a
1776 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1777 widget), hiding replace and options.
1779 \change_deleted 34634807 1620400535
1781 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1786 button brings you back to the full size.
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 \paragraph_spacing single
1793 also offers an advanced
1796 \begin_inset space ~
1800 \begin_inset space ~
1805 feature that is described in section
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1812 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1819 \begin_layout Standard
1820 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1821 \begin_inset space \space{}
1825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1833 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1835 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1840 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1851 arg "inset-select-all"
1854 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1855 When the cursor is inside an inset
1858 arg "inset-select-all"
1861 selects the content of the inset.
1865 arg "inset-select-all"
1868 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1869 then to the whole document.
1873 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1876 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1880 \begin_layout Section
1882 \begin_inset Index idx
1885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1892 \begin_inset Index idx
1895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1904 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1911 \begin_layout Standard
1912 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1914 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 or the toolbar button
1927 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1929 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1932 or the toolbar button
1939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1946 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1950 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1953 \begin_layout Standard
1955 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1956 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1965 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1966 This is a consequence of the 100
1967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1970 step undo limit mentioned above.
1973 \begin_layout Standard
1982 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1984 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1988 \begin_layout Section
1990 \begin_inset Index idx
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2002 \begin_layout Standard
2003 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2006 \begin_layout Enumerate
2011 \begin_layout Itemize
2016 once anywhere in the edit window.
2017 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2021 \begin_layout Enumerate
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2033 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2036 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2040 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2043 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2049 \begin_layout Itemize
2050 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2053 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2060 \begin_layout Enumerate
2061 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2066 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2067 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2071 \begin_layout Section
2073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2075 name "sec:Navigating"
2080 \begin_inset Index idx
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2094 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2097 \begin_layout Itemize
2102 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2103 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2106 \begin_layout Itemize
2107 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2109 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2111 \begin_inset space ~
2116 or by the toolbar button
2119 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2125 \begin_layout Itemize
2126 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2128 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2131 and use the same menu to return to them.
2132 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2135 \begin_layout Standard
2139 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2144 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2145 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2147 \begin_inset space ~
2152 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2153 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2154 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2155 last editing position.
2158 \begin_layout Standard
2163 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2167 \begin_layout Subsection
2169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2171 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2176 \begin_inset Index idx
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 Navigating ! Outline
2186 \begin_inset Index idx
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 \begin_layout Standard
2199 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2200 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2201 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2208 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2212 ), notes, or citations (see section
2213 \begin_inset space ~
2217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2219 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2224 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2229 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2230 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2231 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2232 dialog and to modify the citation.
2235 \begin_layout Standard
2240 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2241 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2243 Labels and References
2245 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2254 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2259 control the display.
2264 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2265 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2270 option keeps it in the current view state.
2271 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2272 \begin_inset space ~
2275 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2276 \begin_inset space ~
2279 3, the subsections of sections
2280 \begin_inset space ~
2283 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2288 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2303 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2306 \begin_layout Standard
2313 button refreshes the TOC (
2314 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2316 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2320 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2322 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2326 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2330 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2334 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2338 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2340 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2344 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2346 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2350 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2352 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2356 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2360 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2362 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2366 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2370 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2374 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2378 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2382 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2386 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2390 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2394 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2396 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2400 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2414 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2415 For example, you can move section
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2420 \begin_inset space ~
2423 2.4 or after section
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2429 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2442 (or the corresponding key bindings
2450 ) you can change the level of sections.
2451 You can make section
2452 \begin_inset space ~
2456 \begin_inset space ~
2460 \begin_inset space ~
2466 \begin_layout Standard
2467 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2468 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2471 \begin_layout Subsection
2472 Horizontal Scrolling
2473 \begin_inset Index idx
2476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2477 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2485 \begin_layout Standard
2487 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2489 \begin_inset space ~
2492 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2493 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2494 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2498 \begin_layout Standard
2499 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2503 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 is used on a small tablet computer
2508 \begin_layout Itemize
2509 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2521 \begin_inset space ~
2534 \begin_layout Itemize
2535 Math constructs with long command names
2538 \begin_layout Standard
2539 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2540 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2542 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2543 window so that table
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2550 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2555 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2557 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2558 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2561 \begin_layout Standard
2562 \begin_inset Float table
2569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2570 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2575 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2579 Horizontal scrolling test.
2587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2589 \begin_inset Tabular
2590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2591 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2636 \begin_layout Section
2637 Input/Word Completion
2638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2640 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2645 \begin_inset Index idx
2648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_inset Index idx
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2689 \begin_layout Standard
2691 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2693 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2694 is used to propose completions.
2697 \begin_layout Standard
2698 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2706 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2713 \begin_inset space ~
2717 \begin_inset space ~
2722 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2731 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2732 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2742 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2743 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2744 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2745 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2748 \begin_layout Standard
2750 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2751 completions available.
2756 key to accept a proposed completion.
2757 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2758 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2759 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2762 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2769 \begin_layout Standard
2770 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2771 ing options for text.
2773 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2775 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2777 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2780 he special math option
2784 enables characters to be composed.
2786 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2788 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2792 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2795 you want to insert the character
2796 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2800 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2803 input the characters
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2816 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2818 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2822 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2829 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2834 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2837 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2839 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2842 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2847 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2853 's installation folder.
2855 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2856 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2863 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2868 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2869 In the example above,
2874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2906 \begin_layout Section
2908 \begin_inset Index idx
2911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2918 \begin_inset Index idx
2921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2950 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2984 \begin_layout Standard
2985 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2999 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3002 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3006 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3007 \begin_inset space ~
3011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3013 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3020 \begin_layout Standard
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3032 \begin_inset space ~
3053 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3057 \begin_layout Labeling
3058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3062 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3063 LatexCommand nomenclature
3065 description "Tabulator key"
3072 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3074 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3075 \begin_inset space ~
3079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3081 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3088 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3092 , especially section
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3099 reference "subsec:Lists"
3105 If you are still confused, look in the
3110 \begin_inset Newline newline
3118 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3119 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3123 \begin_layout Labeling
3124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3128 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3129 LatexCommand nomenclature
3131 description "Escape key"
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3146 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3147 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3150 \begin_layout Labeling
3151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3156 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3157 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 There are three modifier keys:
3165 \begin_layout Labeling
3166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3185 LatexCommand nomenclature
3187 description "Control key"
3192 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3193 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3197 \begin_layout Itemize
3206 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3209 \begin_layout Itemize
3218 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3221 \begin_layout Itemize
3230 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3234 \begin_layout Labeling
3235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3253 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3254 LatexCommand nomenclature
3256 description "Shift key"
3261 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3262 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3265 \begin_layout Labeling
3266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3284 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3285 LatexCommand nomenclature
3287 description "Alt or Meta key"
3292 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3293 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3294 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3300 \begin_inset Newline newline
3303 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3305 menu accelerator keys
3308 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3309 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 For example, the sequence
3315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3321 \begin_inset space ~
3325 \begin_inset space ~
3331 \begin_inset space ~
3339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3358 \begin_inset space ~
3364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3374 \begin_layout Standard
3379 manual lists all other things bound to the
3387 \begin_layout Standard
3388 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3390 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3392 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3393 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3395 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3396 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3397 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3399 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3415 followed by a capital
3422 \begin_layout Chapter
3425 \begin_inset Index idx
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_layout Section
3440 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 \begin_layout Subsection
3456 \begin_layout Standard
3457 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3458 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3459 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3460 numbering schemes, and so on.
3461 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3462 and format the title of your document differently.
3465 \begin_layout Standard
3470 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3471 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3472 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3473 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3474 picks one for you by default.
3475 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3478 \begin_layout Subsection
3480 \begin_inset Index idx
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3492 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 You can select a class using the
3502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3507 \begin_inset Index idx
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3525 \begin_layout Standard
3526 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3531 \begin_layout Description
3532 Article for basic articles
3535 \begin_layout Description
3536 Report for basic reports
3539 \begin_layout Description
3540 Book for writing a book
3543 \begin_layout Description
3544 Letter for US-style letters
3547 \begin_layout Standard
3548 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3549 only uses if you have installed
3550 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3551 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3552 distributions will include
3554 Here are some of the classes.
3555 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3557 Special Document Classes
3566 \begin_layout Description
3567 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3570 \begin_layout Description
3571 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3575 \begin_layout Description
3576 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3580 \begin_layout Description
3581 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3582 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3583 There are three article layouts available.
3584 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3585 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3586 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3587 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3592 sequential numbering
3593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3596 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3597 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3598 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3599 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3602 \begin_layout Description
3603 Beamer Layout for presentations
3606 \begin_layout Description
3607 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3608 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3609 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3610 with \SpecialChar LyX
3614 \begin_layout Description
3615 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3618 \begin_layout Description
3620 \begin_inset space ~
3623 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3626 \begin_layout Description
3627 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3630 \begin_layout Description
3631 Foils Used to make transparencies
3634 \begin_layout Description
3635 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3636 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3637 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3638 with \SpecialChar LyX
3642 \begin_layout Description
3643 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3644 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3647 \begin_layout Description
3648 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3651 \begin_layout Description
3652 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3655 \begin_layout Description
3656 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3657 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3658 (Is used by this document.)
3661 \begin_layout Description
3662 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3665 \begin_layout Description
3666 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3669 \begin_layout Description
3674 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3675 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3677 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 Slides Used to make transparencies
3685 \begin_layout Description
3687 \begin_inset space ~
3690 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3691 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3694 \begin_layout Description
3695 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3701 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3703 Special Document Classes
3710 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3711 of the document classes.
3714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3724 \begin_inset Index idx
3727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3744 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3745 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3747 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3750 \begin_layout Standard
3753 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3758 , are highly specialized.
3760 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3761 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3762 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3763 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3764 by some document class.
3765 There are just too many of them.
3766 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3769 \begin_layout Standard
3770 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3778 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3779 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3780 document class for a new file.
3782 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3785 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3792 manual for information on how to install them.
3793 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3801 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3802 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3803 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3804 class files to be used for dissertation
3805 s submitted to those universities.
3806 The \SpecialChar LyX
3807 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3809 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3813 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3819 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3826 name "subsec:Modules"
3831 \begin_inset Index idx
3834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 \begin_layout Standard
3844 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3845 chosen document class.
3846 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3847 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3858 \begin_inset Index idx
3861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3874 packages or file format converters that are not always
3875 installed by default.
3877 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3878 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3879 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3880 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3882 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3883 file without the missing prerequisites.
3884 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3885 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3888 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3892 \begin_inset Index idx
3895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3903 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3907 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3911 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3920 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3922 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3933 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3936 \begin_layout Standard
3937 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3945 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3947 will advise you about these things.
3955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3964 \begin_inset Index idx
3967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 Document ! Local Layout
3976 \begin_layout Standard
3977 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3978 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3979 : They are intended to be used in
3980 a variety of different documents.
3981 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3982 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3983 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3984 need a specific inset or
3985 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3987 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3990 style only that one time.
3991 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4011 manual for information on how to use it.
4014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4018 \begin_layout Standard
4019 Each class has a default set of options.
4020 Here's a quick table describing them:
4023 \begin_layout Standard
4024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4030 \begin_layout Standard
4032 \begin_inset Tabular
4033 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4034 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4493 \begin_layout Standard
4494 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4500 \begin_layout Standard
4501 You're probably also wondering what
4502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4514 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4515 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4520 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4525 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4535 headings, there are also
4543 headings, and so on.
4544 We will describe these headings fully in section
4545 \begin_inset space ~
4549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4551 reference "subsec:Headings"
4558 \begin_layout Subsection
4560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4562 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4567 \begin_inset Index idx
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4589 \begin_layout Standard
4590 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4599 \begin_inset space ~
4607 \begin_inset space ~
4612 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4614 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4615 doesn't support special options you want to
4616 use for your document.
4617 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4618 -class and its options, you have to read
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4624 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4628 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4632 \begin_inset space ~
4639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4645 \begin_inset space ~
4650 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4651 You can choose between the following five options:
4654 \begin_layout Labeling
4655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4660 Use default page style of current class.
4663 \begin_layout Labeling
4664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4669 No page numbers or headings.
4672 \begin_layout Labeling
4673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4681 \begin_layout Labeling
4682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4687 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4688 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4689 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4690 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4693 \begin_layout Labeling
4694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4699 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4700 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4706 \begin_inset Index idx
4709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4717 How they are defined is explained in section
4718 \begin_inset space ~
4722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4724 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4733 \begin_inset space ~
4737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4739 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4746 \begin_layout Subsection
4747 Paper Size and Orientation
4748 \begin_inset Index idx
4751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4752 Document ! Paper size
4758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4760 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4767 \begin_layout Standard
4768 You can find the following options in the menu
4771 \begin_inset space ~
4778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4782 \begin_inset Index idx
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4794 \begin_layout Labeling
4795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4799 \begin_inset space ~
4804 What size paper to print on.
4809 \begin_layout Itemize
4815 \begin_layout Itemize
4821 \begin_layout Itemize
4827 \begin_layout Itemize
4833 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 US letter, US legal, US executive
4839 \begin_layout Itemize
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4852 \begin_layout Labeling
4853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4858 To choose whether to output as
4869 \begin_layout Labeling
4870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4874 \begin_inset space ~
4879 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4880 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4883 \begin_layout Subsection
4885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4887 name "subsec:Margins"
4892 \begin_inset Index idx
4895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4902 \begin_inset Index idx
4905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4914 \begin_layout Standard
4915 Paper margins are set in the menu
4917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4921 \begin_inset Index idx
4924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 \begin_layout Standard
4934 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4935 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4936 the paper format and the font size into account.
4939 \begin_layout Subsection
4943 \begin_layout Standard
4944 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4945 has to convert everything into the new
4947 That includes the paragraph environments.
4948 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4949 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4950 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4952 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4961 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4963 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4964 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4965 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4968 \begin_layout Section
4969 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4970 \begin_inset Index idx
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 Paragraph ! Indentation
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4986 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4995 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5000 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5001 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5002 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5006 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5012 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5013 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5014 language than English.
5016 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5020 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5021 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5022 into \SpecialChar LyX
5024 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5027 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5029 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5030 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5031 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5038 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5039 goes to produce a printable file.
5044 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5046 gives you the ability globally to change
5050 these pre-coded spacings.
5051 We will explain more later.
5054 \begin_layout Subsection
5055 Paragraph Separation
5056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5058 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5063 \begin_inset Index idx
5066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5067 Paragraph ! Separation
5075 \begin_layout Standard
5083 \begin_inset space ~
5091 \begin_inset space ~
5098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5102 \begin_inset Index idx
5105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5111 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5114 \begin_layout Subsection
5118 \begin_layout Standard
5119 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5124 \begin_inset space ~
5129 dialog and toggle the
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5137 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5140 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5144 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5145 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5149 \begin_layout Standard
5150 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5151 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5154 \begin_layout Subsection
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5168 \begin_layout Standard
5171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5175 \begin_inset Index idx
5178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5187 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5191 \begin_inset space ~
5200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5201 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5207 \begin_inset Index idx
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5217 installed to use this feature.
5222 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5231 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5232 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5235 \begin_layout Section
5236 Paragraph Environments
5237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5239 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5244 \begin_inset Index idx
5247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5248 Paragraph ! Environments
5254 \begin_inset Index idx
5257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5258 Paragraph environments|(
5266 \begin_layout Subsection
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5274 \begin_layout Standard
5283 } \SpecialChar ldots
5293 \begin_inset Newline newline
5296 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5298 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5299 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5300 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5309 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5312 \begin_layout Standard
5313 A paragraph environment is simply a
5314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5321 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5322 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5323 scheme, labels, and so on.
5324 Additionally, you can
5325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5332 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5333 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5334 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5335 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5337 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5339 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5342 \begin_layout Standard
5343 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5344 \begin_inset Graphics
5345 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5351 at the left end of the toolbar.
5353 will change the environment of the
5357 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5358 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5359 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5371 create a new paragraph using the
5375 paragraph environment.
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5384 because if you are in one of these environments:
5387 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5423 \begin_layout Itemize
5429 \begin_layout Standard
5431 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5435 , rather than resetting it to
5440 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5441 \begin_inset space ~
5445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5447 reference "sec:Nesting"
5454 \begin_layout Subsection
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 The default paragraph environment is
5464 It creates a plain paragraph.
5466 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5467 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5468 this manual) are in the
5475 \begin_layout Standard
5476 You can nest a paragraph using the
5480 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5488 \begin_layout Subsection
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5504 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5513 for thanks or contact information.
5514 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5515 places all of this on a separate page
5516 along with today's date.
5517 For other types of documents, the title
5518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5525 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5530 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5544 Here's how you use them:
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 Put the title of your document in the
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 Put the author name in the
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5565 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5571 Note that using this environment is optional.
5572 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5573 will automatically insert today's date.
5574 If you don't want a date, use the option
5576 Suppress default date on front page
5580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5583 \begin_inset space ~
5591 \begin_layout Standard
5592 You can use footnotes to insert
5593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5600 or contact information.
5603 \begin_layout Subsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5617 name "subsec:Headings"
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5627 takes care of the numbering for you.
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5632 \begin_inset Index idx
5635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5636 Section headings ! Numbered
5644 \begin_layout Standard
5645 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5649 \begin_layout Enumerate
5655 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 \begin_layout Enumerate
5667 \begin_layout Enumerate
5673 \begin_layout Enumerate
5679 \begin_layout Enumerate
5685 \begin_layout Enumerate
5691 \begin_layout Standard
5693 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5694 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5695 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5696 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5698 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5700 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5706 \begin_layout Standard
5707 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5708 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5709 You group the book into chapters.
5711 does a similar grouping:
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 is divided into either
5730 \begin_layout Itemize
5742 \begin_layout Itemize
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5790 \begin_layout Standard
5791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5799 Not all document types use the
5803 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5808 is the top-level heading.
5816 \begin_layout Standard
5821 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5822 labels it with its number,
5823 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5825 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5839 \begin_inset Index idx
5842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5851 \begin_layout Standard
5852 The unnumbered section headings have a
5853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5860 at the end of their name.
5861 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5862 the table of contents, see section
5863 \begin_inset space ~
5867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5877 Changing the Numbering
5878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5880 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5887 \begin_layout Standard
5888 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5889 in the Table of Contents.
5890 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5892 Just as certain classes start with
5906 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5916 This is something you can change.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5926 \begin_inset Index idx
5929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5938 \begin_inset space ~
5942 \begin_inset space ~
5947 you will see two counters.
5952 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5953 numbers a section heading.
5954 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5959 Short Titles of Headings
5960 \begin_inset Index idx
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 Section headings ! Short titles
5970 \begin_inset Argument 1
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5982 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5989 \begin_layout Standard
5990 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5991 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5992 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5993 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5996 \begin_layout Standard
5998 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5999 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6000 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6001 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6006 \begin_inset space ~
6012 This will insert a box labeled
6013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6024 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6025 This also works for captions inside floats.
6026 There can only be one short title per title.
6029 \begin_layout Standard
6030 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6038 The following information applies to all section headings:
6041 \begin_layout Itemize
6042 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6045 \begin_layout Itemize
6046 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6049 \begin_layout Itemize
6050 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6053 \begin_layout Itemize
6054 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6057 \begin_layout Subsection
6061 \begin_layout Standard
6063 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6077 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6078 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6079 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6080 the text they contain.
6081 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6089 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6092 \begin_layout Standard
6093 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6102 when you start a new paragraph.
6103 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6107 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6108 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6109 have to change back to the
6113 environment yourself.
6116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6125 \begin_inset Index idx
6128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6137 \begin_layout Standard
6138 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6139 time for the differences.
6148 are identical except for one difference:
6152 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6161 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 Here's an example of the
6178 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6180 See – no indentation!
6184 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6185 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6186 the other paragraph.
6189 \begin_layout Standard
6190 Here's another example, this time in the
6197 \begin_layout Quotation
6203 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6204 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6205 the first line, then
6209 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6213 you were quoting other text.
6216 \begin_layout Quotation
6217 Here's a new paragraph.
6218 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6219 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6222 \begin_layout Standard
6223 As the examples show,
6227 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6228 They should put quotes in the
6233 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6237 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6242 \begin_inset Index idx
6245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6252 \begin_inset Index idx
6255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6271 \begin_layout Standard
6276 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6282 \begin_inset Newline newline
6285 Which I did not rehearse!
6289 It could be much worse.
6290 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6292 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6293 indented a bit more than the first.
6294 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6300 \begin_inset Newline newline
6303 And make things look fine
6304 \begin_inset Newline newline
6310 arg "newline-insert newline"
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6321 does not indent both margins.
6322 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6323 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6326 arg "newline-insert newline"
6332 \begin_layout Subsection
6334 \begin_inset Index idx
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6353 \begin_layout Standard
6355 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6365 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6366 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6375 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6376 lets you provide your own label.
6377 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6378 describing some general features of all four of them.
6381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6385 \begin_layout Standard
6386 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6388 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6389 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6398 reset the environment to
6402 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6403 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6404 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6412 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6419 \begin_layout Standard
6420 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6421 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6422 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6424 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6425 you read all of section
6426 \begin_inset space ~
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6432 reference "sec:Nesting"
6439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6441 \begin_inset Index idx
6444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6460 \begin_layout Standard
6461 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6465 paragraph environment.
6466 It has the following properties:
6469 \begin_layout Itemize
6470 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6474 \begin_layout Itemize
6476 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6479 \begin_layout Itemize
6480 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6484 \begin_layout Itemize
6485 The items can have any length.
6487 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6488 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6495 \begin_layout Itemize
6500 environment inside another
6504 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6508 \begin_layout Itemize
6509 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6512 \begin_layout Itemize
6514 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6517 \begin_layout Itemize
6519 \begin_inset space ~
6523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6525 reference "sec:Nesting"
6529 for a full explanation of nesting.
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6534 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6543 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6547 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6548 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6551 \begin_layout Itemize
6552 The label for the first level
6556 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6561 The label for the second level is a dash.
6565 \begin_layout Itemize
6566 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6570 \begin_layout Itemize
6571 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6575 \begin_layout Itemize
6576 Back out to the third level.
6580 \begin_layout Itemize
6581 Back to the second level.
6585 \begin_layout Itemize
6586 Back to the outermost level.
6589 \begin_layout Standard
6590 These are the default labels for an
6595 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6600 dialog in the submenu
6605 \begin_inset Index idx
6608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6614 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6620 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6622 \begin_inset space ~
6626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6628 reference "sec:Nesting"
6635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6637 \begin_inset Index idx
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6649 name "sec:Enumerate"
6656 \begin_layout Standard
6661 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6662 It has these properties:
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6666 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6675 \begin_layout Enumerate
6677 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6680 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 environment resets the counter to one.
6688 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_layout Enumerate
6702 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6703 Items can have any length.
6706 \begin_layout Enumerate
6707 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6710 \begin_layout Enumerate
6711 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6714 \begin_layout Enumerate
6715 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6719 \begin_layout Standard
6728 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6730 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6731 labels the four different levels in an
6738 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 The first level of an
6743 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6747 \begin_layout Enumerate
6748 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6752 \begin_layout Enumerate
6753 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6761 \begin_layout Enumerate
6762 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 Back to the third level
6772 \begin_layout Enumerate
6773 Back to the second level.
6777 \begin_layout Enumerate
6778 Back to the outermost level.
6781 \begin_layout Standard
6782 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6786 environment, see section
6787 \begin_inset space ~
6791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6793 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6798 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6802 \begin_layout Standard
6803 There is more to nesting
6807 environments than we've stated here.
6808 You should read section
6809 \begin_inset space ~
6813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6815 reference "sec:Nesting"
6819 to learn more about nesting.
6822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6824 \begin_inset Index idx
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6841 list has no fixed label.
6842 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6851 of the first line as the label.
6855 \begin_layout Description
6856 Example: This is an example of the
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6865 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6878 it is meant that the first usage of the
6882 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6884 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6892 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6898 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6900 \begin_inset space ~
6906 \begin_inset space ~
6910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6912 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6916 for more information.) Here is an example:
6919 \begin_layout Description
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6924 Example: This one shows how to use a
6927 \begin_inset space ~
6939 \begin_layout Description
6940 Usage: You should use the
6944 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6945 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6947 It's not a good idea to use a
6951 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6952 You're better off using
6964 paragraphs into them.
6967 \begin_layout Description
6968 Nesting: You can nest
6972 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6978 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6979 them from the first line.
6982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6984 \begin_inset Index idx
6987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 \begin_layout Standard
7001 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7002 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7015 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7017 Here are its properties:
7020 \begin_layout Labeling
7021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7023 \begin_inset space ~
7026 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7035 of each line as the item label.
7040 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7041 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7042 space as described above.
7045 \begin_layout Labeling
7046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7047 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7048 uses different margins for the item label and the
7049 body of the item text.
7050 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7051 label width plus a little extra space.
7054 \begin_layout Labeling
7055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7057 \begin_inset space ~
7060 width \SpecialChar LyX
7061 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7062 If the label width is larger, the label
7063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7070 into the first line.
7071 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7072 margin of the rest of the item text.
7075 \begin_layout Labeling
7076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7078 \begin_inset space ~
7081 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7086 environment has the same left margin.
7087 \begin_inset Newline newline
7090 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7095 \begin_inset space ~
7100 dialog (toolbar button
7103 arg "layout-paragraph"
7110 \begin_inset space ~
7115 determines the default label width.
7116 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7125 multiple times instead.
7126 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7136 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7139 \begin_inset space ~
7144 every time you alter a label in a
7149 \begin_inset Newline newline
7152 The predefined default width is the length of
7153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7161 \begin_inset space ~
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7172 list the same way as the
7176 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7182 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7191 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7192 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7194 \begin_inset space ~
7198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7200 reference "sec:Nesting"
7204 to learn about nesting.
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 There is yet another feature of the
7212 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7213 left-justifies the item labels by
7215 You can use additional
7219 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7220 justifies the item label.
7225 are documented in section
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7232 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7237 Here are some examples:
7240 \begin_layout Labeling
7241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7242 Left The default for
7249 \begin_layout Labeling
7250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7258 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7261 \begin_layout Labeling
7262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7274 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7277 \begin_layout Subsection
7279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7281 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7286 \begin_inset Index idx
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7298 \begin_layout Standard
7299 The features described in this section require that the module
7301 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7303 is loaded in the document settings.
7304 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7310 \begin_inset Index idx
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7324 Custom Enumerate Lists
7325 \begin_inset Index idx
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7339 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7345 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7346 There you add the command
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7371 Code, look at section
7372 \begin_inset space ~
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7378 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7391 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7398 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7399 For capital Roman numerals replace
7411 in the command above.
7412 For Arabic numerals use
7420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7427 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7442 \begin_layout Standard
7444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7452 You can only number 26
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7456 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7466 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7470 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7473 \begin_layout Enumerate
7474 \begin_inset Argument 1
7477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7504 \begin_inset Argument 1
7507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7530 \begin_layout Enumerate
7535 \begin_layout Enumerate
7536 \begin_inset Argument 1
7539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_inset Argument 1
7567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_layout Standard
7594 For this list these commands were used:
7597 \begin_layout Standard
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7616 \begin_inset Newline newline
7624 \begin_inset Newline newline
7634 \begin_layout Standard
7641 makes the label emphasized and
7650 \begin_layout Standard
7651 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7659 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7660 lists until you change the definition.
7668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7670 \begin_inset Index idx
7673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7674 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7682 \begin_layout Standard
7683 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7686 \begin_layout Enumerate
7687 \begin_inset Argument 1
7690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7709 \begin_inset Note Note
7712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 goes back to default numbering
7721 \begin_layout Enumerate
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7729 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7734 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7740 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7741 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7742 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7743 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7744 , but in the output.
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7758 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7768 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7770 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7771 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7772 of a normal enumeration.
7773 There, insert the command
7776 \begin_layout Standard
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7787 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7791 \begin_layout Enumerate
7795 \begin_layout Enumerate
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7803 \begin_layout Enumerate
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7823 This enumeration starts at 4
7826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7828 \begin_inset Index idx
7831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7843 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7846 \begin_layout Itemize
7850 \begin_layout Itemize
7851 with standard spacing
7854 \begin_layout Standard
7855 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7857 Add there the command
7861 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7864 \begin_layout Itemize
7865 \begin_inset Argument 1
7868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7887 \begin_layout Itemize
7891 \begin_layout Itemize
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7896 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7903 \begin_inset Index idx
7906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7914 For more information see its documentation,
7915 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7928 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7929 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7933 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7936 \begin_layout Enumerate
7937 \begin_inset Argument 1
7940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7948 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7961 \begin_layout Enumerate
7962 with negative indentation
7965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7966 Further Customization
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7971 Lists ! Customization
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 You can also change the style of description lists.
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7990 \begin_layout Standard
7991 changes the description label font, the command
7994 \begin_layout Standard
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8001 sets the list style.
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8005 An example where the command
8008 \begin_layout Standard
8013 itshape, style=nextline
8016 \begin_layout Standard
8020 \begin_layout Description
8022 \begin_inset space ~
8026 \begin_inset Argument 1
8029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8037 itshape, style=nextline
8047 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8048 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8052 \begin_layout Description
8054 \begin_inset space ~
8057 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8058 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8059 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8063 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8069 \begin_inset Index idx
8072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8080 For more information see its documentation
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8091 \begin_layout Subsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8107 \begin_inset space ~
8110 Address: An Overview
8113 \begin_layout Standard
8114 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8115 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8123 \begin_inset space ~
8129 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8130 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 gags on the document.
8132 In contrast, you can use the
8139 \begin_inset space ~
8144 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8145 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8149 \begin_layout Standard
8150 Of course, you're not limited to using
8157 \begin_inset space ~
8166 \begin_inset space ~
8171 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8172 some European academic papers.
8175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8179 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8191 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8192 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8196 \begin_inset space ~
8201 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8202 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8203 Here's an example of each:
8206 \begin_layout Right Address
8208 \begin_inset Newline newline
8212 \begin_inset Newline newline
8216 \begin_inset Newline newline
8219 When is it? What is today?
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8226 \begin_inset space ~
8232 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8234 the largest block of text on a single line.
8235 Here's an example of the
8242 \begin_layout Address
8244 \begin_inset Newline newline
8247 Where do I send this
8248 \begin_inset Newline newline
8251 Your post office and country
8254 \begin_layout Standard
8255 As you can see, both
8262 \begin_inset space ~
8267 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8272 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8273 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8279 This makes sense, since
8287 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8288 Thus, you have to use
8295 arg "newline-insert newline"
8300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8301 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_inset space ~
8312 ) to start a new line in an
8319 \begin_inset space ~
8327 \begin_layout Subsection
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8333 or list of references.
8335 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8340 \begin_inset Index idx
8343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8357 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8358 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8359 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8360 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8364 in anything else or vice versa.
8370 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8371 The book document classes ignores the
8375 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8379 in a letter document class.
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8387 environment does several things for you.
8388 First, it puts the centered label
8389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8397 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8399 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8400 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8401 the subsequent text.
8402 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8404 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8409 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8413 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8414 The new paragraph will still be in the
8419 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8420 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8424 \begin_inset Float figure
8431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8433 \begin_inset Graphics
8434 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8442 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8447 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 We would love to demonstrate the
8473 environment, but since this document is in the
8474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8481 class, we can't do this.
8482 We inserted it therefore as figure
8483 \begin_inset space ~
8487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8489 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8494 If you have never heard of an
8495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8502 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8507 \begin_inset Index idx
8510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8519 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8531 environment is used to list references.
8532 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8533 only use it at the end of the document.
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 When you first open a
8550 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8551 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8567 depending on the document class.
8568 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8569 Each paragraph of the
8573 environment is a bibliography entry.
8578 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8579 Each new paragraph is still in the
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8588 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8590 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8592 handling, have a look at section
8593 \begin_inset space ~
8597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8599 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8606 \begin_layout Subsection
8607 Special Environments
8610 \begin_layout Standard
8612 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8613 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8621 \begin_inset Index idx
8624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8634 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8641 \begin_layout Standard
8647 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8649 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8654 key as a fixed whitespace.
8658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8671 \begin_inset space ~
8676 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8694 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8697 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8700 arg "newline-insert newline"
8717 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8718 So, when you finish using the
8723 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8724 Also, you can nest the
8729 environment inside of others.
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 arg "newline-insert newline"
8743 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8748 \begin_inset space \space{}
8758 arg "newline-insert newline"
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 arg "newline-insert newline"
8778 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8786 You must put at least one
8790 in any line you want blank.
8791 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8796 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8800 since that will insert
8805 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8808 arg "self-insert \""
8814 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8822 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8826 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8830 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8834 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8835 printf("Hello World!
8840 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8844 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 This is just the standard
8850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8866 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8868 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8869 as if you used a typewriter.
8870 \begin_inset Index idx
8873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8874 Paragraph environments|)
8879 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8882 Program Code Listings
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8899 \begin_inset Index idx
8902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8916 environment is similar to the
8921 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8922 computer console text.
8927 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8941 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8942 you can have empty lines.
8955 \begin_layout Itemize
8956 have a certain language and a text style
8959 \begin_layout Itemize
8960 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8961 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8962 and \SpecialChar TeX
8966 \begin_layout Standard
8967 Because of these properties
8971 works like a typewriter.
8975 \begin_layout Verbatim
8980 \begin_layout Verbatim
8984 The following 2 lines are empty:
8987 \begin_layout Verbatim
8991 \begin_layout Verbatim
8995 \begin_layout Verbatim
8997 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9002 \begin_layout Standard
9007 environment is identical to
9011 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9012 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9019 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9024 \begin_layout Section
9025 Nesting Environments
9026 \begin_inset Index idx
9029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9030 Nesting ! Environments
9036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9045 \begin_layout Subsection
9049 \begin_layout Standard
9051 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9053 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9055 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9057 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9069 \begin_layout Enumerate
9073 \begin_layout Enumerate
9078 \begin_layout Enumerate
9082 \begin_layout Enumerate
9087 \begin_layout Enumerate
9091 \begin_layout Standard
9092 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9093 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9095 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9097 \begin_inset space ~
9101 \begin_inset space ~
9109 \begin_inset space ~
9113 \begin_inset space ~
9118 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9120 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9123 arg "depth-increment"
9129 arg "depth-decrement"
9143 arg "depth-increment"
9149 arg "depth-decrement"
9153 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9154 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9160 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9161 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9162 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9163 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9166 \begin_layout Standard
9167 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9169 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9171 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9174 \begin_layout Subsection
9175 What You Can and Can't Nest
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9180 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9185 than a simple yes or no.
9186 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9190 Completely unnestable
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9194 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9198 \begin_layout Itemize
9199 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9205 environments have them:
9208 \begin_layout Description
9209 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9210 Can't nest into them.
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9220 \begin_layout Itemize
9226 \begin_layout Itemize
9232 \begin_layout Itemize
9238 \begin_layout Itemize
9245 \begin_layout Description
9247 \begin_inset space ~
9250 Nestable You can nest them.
9251 You can nest other things into them.
9255 \begin_layout Itemize
9261 \begin_layout Itemize
9267 \begin_layout Itemize
9273 \begin_layout Itemize
9279 \begin_layout Itemize
9285 \begin_layout Itemize
9291 \begin_layout Itemize
9297 \begin_layout Itemize
9304 \begin_layout Itemize
9310 \begin_layout Itemize
9317 \begin_layout Description
9318 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9319 You can't nest anything into them.
9323 \begin_layout Itemize
9329 \begin_layout Itemize
9335 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9347 \begin_layout Itemize
9353 \begin_layout Itemize
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Itemize
9383 \begin_layout Itemize
9389 \begin_layout Itemize
9395 \begin_layout Itemize
9401 \begin_layout Itemize
9405 \begin_inset space ~
9411 \begin_layout Itemize
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9427 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9437 \begin_inset space ~
9440 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9441 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9442 nested section headings violate this.
9450 \begin_layout Subsection
9451 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9452 \begin_inset Index idx
9455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9456 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9465 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9466 affected by nesting anyhow.
9470 \begin_layout Itemize
9474 \begin_layout Itemize
9478 \begin_layout Itemize
9482 \begin_layout Standard
9484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9492 Figures and tables in
9496 are not affected by this.
9501 Have a look at section
9502 \begin_inset space ~
9506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9508 reference "sec:Floats"
9512 for more information about
9519 \begin_layout Standard
9521 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9522 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9526 \begin_layout Standard
9527 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9535 of its own, it behaves just like a
9536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9543 paragraph environment.
9544 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9548 \begin_layout Standard
9549 Here's an example with a table:
9552 \begin_layout Enumerate
9557 \begin_layout Enumerate
9558 This is (a) and it's nested.
9562 \begin_layout Standard
9563 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9569 \begin_layout Standard
9571 \begin_inset Tabular
9572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9573 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9659 \begin_layout Standard
9660 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9667 \begin_layout Enumerate
9669 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9673 \begin_layout Enumerate
9677 \begin_layout Standard
9678 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9681 \begin_layout Enumerate
9686 \begin_layout Enumerate
9687 This is (a) and it's nested.
9691 \begin_layout Standard
9692 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9698 \begin_layout Standard
9700 \begin_inset Tabular
9701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9702 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9703 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9704 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9788 \begin_layout Standard
9789 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9805 \begin_layout Enumerate
9809 \begin_layout Standard
9810 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9815 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9818 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9821 \begin_layout Enumerate
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9827 This is (a) and it's nested.
9830 \begin_layout Standard
9831 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9837 \begin_layout Standard
9839 \begin_inset Tabular
9840 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9841 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9842 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9843 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9928 \begin_layout Standard
9929 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9935 \begin_layout Enumerate
9937 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 \begin_layout Standard
9949 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9955 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9956 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9960 \begin_layout Subsection
9961 Usage and General Features
9964 \begin_layout Standard
9965 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9966 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9975 is the innermost possible depth.
9976 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9979 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 level #1 – outermost
9984 \begin_layout Enumerate
9989 \begin_layout Enumerate
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 \begin_layout Itemize
10004 \begin_layout Itemize
10013 \begin_layout Standard
10014 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10015 both of them in the example.
10016 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10026 For example, if we tried to nest another
10031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10038 , we would get errors.
10041 \begin_layout Subsection
10043 \begin_inset Index idx
10046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10055 \begin_layout Standard
10056 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10057 We have several examples of nested environments.
10058 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10063 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10066 \begin_layout Labeling
10067 \labelwidthstring MMM
10068 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10077 \begin_layout Labeling
10078 \labelwidthstring MMM
10079 #2-a This is level #2.
10080 We created it by using
10083 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10089 arg "depth-increment"
10096 \begin_layout Labeling
10097 \labelwidthstring MMM
10098 #3-a This is level #3.
10099 This time, we just enter
10106 arg "depth-increment"
10110 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10114 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10120 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_layout Standard
10132 environment, nested inside of
10133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10141 So, it's at level #4.
10142 We did this by entering
10145 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10151 arg "depth-increment"
10154 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10159 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10175 \begin_layout Standard
10180 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10183 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10189 \begin_layout Labeling
10190 \labelwidthstring MMM
10191 #4-a This is level #4.
10195 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10198 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10203 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10207 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10212 keep nesting things inside
10213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10224 \begin_layout Labeling
10225 \labelwidthstring MMM
10226 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10231 \begin_layout Labeling
10232 \labelwidthstring MMM
10233 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10234 and this is level #6.
10235 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10239 \begin_layout Labeling
10240 \labelwidthstring MMM
10241 #5-b Back to level #5.
10245 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10251 arg "depth-decrement"
10258 \begin_layout Labeling
10259 \labelwidthstring MMM
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 , we're back at level #4.
10276 \begin_layout Labeling
10277 \labelwidthstring MMM
10278 #3-b Back to level #3.
10279 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10283 \begin_layout Labeling
10284 \labelwidthstring MMM
10285 #2-b Back to level #2.
10289 \begin_layout Labeling
10290 \labelwidthstring MMM
10291 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10292 After this sentence, we will enter
10296 and change the paragraph environment back to
10303 \begin_layout Standard
10304 We could have also used the
10320 environment in place of the
10325 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10329 Example 2: Inheritance
10332 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10333 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10336 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10345 arg "depth-increment"
10349 \begin_inset Newline newline
10352 which, we will change to the
10360 \begin_layout Enumerate
10365 environment, at level #2.
10368 \begin_layout Enumerate
10369 Notice how the nested
10373 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10377 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10381 \begin_layout Standard
10382 We ended this example by entering
10387 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10391 and reset the nesting depth by using
10394 arg "depth-decrement"
10400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10401 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10410 \begin_inset Argument 1
10413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10414 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10422 \begin_layout Enumerate
10423 This is level #1, in an
10427 paragraph environment.
10428 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10432 \begin_layout Enumerate
10437 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10443 arg "depth-increment"
10447 Now, what happens if we nest an
10451 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10452 label be? An asterisk?
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10466 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10467 So, its label is a bullet.
10468 (We got here by using
10471 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10477 arg "depth-increment"
10480 , then changing the environment to
10488 \begin_layout Itemize
10489 Here's level #4, produced using
10492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10498 arg "depth-increment"
10502 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10509 to get to level #5.
10510 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10515 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10519 , because we are in the
10527 environment (that is, it is an
10542 \begin_layout Enumerate
10547 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10548 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10552 \begin_layout Enumerate
10553 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10556 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10559 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10562 \begin_layout Enumerate
10566 arg "depth-decrement"
10569 to decrease the depth after the next
10572 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10579 \begin_layout Enumerate
10581 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10586 \begin_layout Enumerate
10588 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10589 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10593 \begin_layout Enumerate
10594 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10603 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10608 reset the counter for the label.
10612 \begin_layout Enumerate
10616 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10622 arg "depth-decrement"
10625 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10626 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10627 into the twofold-nested
10635 \begin_layout Enumerate
10636 The same thing happens if we do another
10639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10645 arg "depth-decrement"
10648 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10651 \begin_layout Standard
10652 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10657 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10668 The number of other
10672 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10679 The same rule applies for the
10683 environment, as well.
10686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10687 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10690 \begin_layout Enumerate
10691 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10692 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10693 the same detail with how we did it.
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10710 arg "depth-increment"
10717 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10718 the example in parentheses someplace.
10719 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10720 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10721 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10725 \begin_layout Enumerate
10730 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10734 \begin_layout Verse
10735 Now we will add verse.
10736 \begin_inset Newline newline
10739 It will get much worse.
10740 \begin_inset Newline newline
10750 arg "depth-increment"
10760 \begin_layout Verse
10761 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10762 \begin_inset Newline newline
10765 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10766 \begin_inset Newline newline
10772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10780 \begin_layout Verse
10781 Here comes a table:
10785 \begin_layout Standard
10786 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Tabular
10795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10796 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10883 \begin_layout Verse
10887 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10897 arg "depth-increment"
10903 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10909 \begin_inset Newline newline
10917 arg "depth-decrement"
10924 \begin_layout Enumerate
10929 : level #1) This is another item.
10930 Note that selecting a
10934 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10935 3 times to put the table inside the
10942 \begin_layout Quotation
10943 We're now ending the
10947 list and changing to
10952 We're still at level #1.
10953 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10954 The next set of paragraphs is a
10955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10962 We will nest both the
10969 \begin_inset space ~
10974 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10978 for the letter body.
10982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10985 to preserve the depth.
10986 Remember that you need to use
10989 arg "newline-insert newline"
10992 to create multiple lines inside the
10999 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_layout Right Address
11011 \begin_inset Newline newline
11014 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11015 \begin_inset Newline newline
11021 \begin_layout Address
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_layout Quotation
11030 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11035 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11036 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11037 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11038 as soon as possible.
11039 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11042 \begin_layout Quotation
11043 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11044 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11045 with your order, along with payment.
11048 \begin_layout Quotation
11049 We thank you again for your patience.
11052 \begin_layout Address
11054 \begin_inset Newline newline
11061 \begin_layout Quotation
11062 That ends that example!
11065 \begin_layout Standard
11066 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11067 gives you a lot of power with just
11069 We could have easily nested an
11090 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11093 \begin_layout Subsection
11095 \begin_inset Index idx
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 Nesting ! Separation
11105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11107 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11114 \begin_layout Standard
11115 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11117 For example you need two different enumerations:
11120 \begin_layout Enumerate
11125 \begin_layout Enumerate
11130 \begin_layout Enumerate
11134 \begin_layout Standard
11135 \begin_inset Separator plain
11141 \begin_layout Itemize
11147 \begin_layout Standard
11148 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11154 \begin_layout Enumerate
11158 \begin_layout Enumerate
11162 \begin_layout Enumerate
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11167 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11168 list item and use the menu
11170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11171 Separated <Name> Above
11175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11176 Separated <Name> Below
11179 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11180 ) and before or behind it the
11182 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11185 \begin_layout Standard
11186 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11187 (red arrow in LyX).
11188 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11189 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11192 \begin_layout Standard
11193 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11196 arg "paragraph-break"
11203 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11206 \begin_layout Section
11207 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11208 \begin_inset Index idx
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11220 \begin_layout Standard
11221 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11222 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11224 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11225 be broken at the end of a line.
11226 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11230 \begin_layout Subsection
11232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11234 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11239 \begin_inset Index idx
11242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11252 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11253 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11254 ) not to break the line at
11256 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11259 \begin_layout Quote
11260 Further documentation is given in section
11261 \begin_inset Newline newline
11265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11267 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11274 \begin_layout Standard
11275 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11290 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11299 A protected space is set with
11301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11302 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11304 \begin_inset space ~
11312 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11318 \begin_layout Subsection
11320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11327 \begin_inset Index idx
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 Spacing ! Horizontal
11339 \begin_layout Standard
11340 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11347 The length units are listed in Appendix
11348 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11354 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11365 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11370 \begin_inset Index idx
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11374 Spaces ! Inter-word
11382 \begin_layout Standard
11383 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11384 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11385 at the ends of sentences.
11386 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11387 automatically takes care about this.
11388 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11389 followed by a period; see section
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11396 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11401 To insert a normal space, select
11403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11404 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11406 \begin_inset space ~
11414 arg "space-insert normal"
11420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11424 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_layout Standard
11443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11450 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11459 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11460 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11461 inside abbreviations:
11464 \begin_layout Quote
11466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11470 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 or between values and units.
11475 Compare for example this:
11476 \begin_inset Newline newline
11480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11484 \begin_inset Newline newline
11487 10 kg (normal space
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11494 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11496 \begin_inset space ~
11504 arg "space-insert thin"
11510 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11515 You can also insert the following space types:
11518 \begin_layout Description
11520 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11522 \begin_inset space ~
11528 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11532 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11536 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11540 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11542 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11545 space between the arrows.
11546 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11550 \begin_layout Description
11552 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11554 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11558 \begin_inset space ~
11561 space A line with a
11562 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11566 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11570 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11574 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11576 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11579 space between the arrows.
11582 \begin_layout Description
11584 \begin_inset space ~
11588 \begin_inset space ~
11591 space A line with a
11592 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11596 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11600 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11603 negative thin space between the arrows.
11606 \begin_layout Description
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11612 \begin_inset space ~
11615 space A line with a
11616 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11620 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11624 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11627 negative medium space between the arrows.
11630 \begin_layout Description
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 space A line with a
11640 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11644 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11648 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11651 negative thick space between the arrows.
11654 \begin_layout Description
11656 \begin_inset space ~
11660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11664 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11668 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11672 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11676 \begin_inset space ~
11680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11683 em) space between the arrows.
11686 \begin_layout Description
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11696 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11700 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11704 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11715 em) space between the arrows.
11718 \begin_layout Description
11720 \begin_inset space ~
11724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11728 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11732 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11736 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11740 \begin_inset space ~
11744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11747 em) space between the arrows.
11750 \begin_layout Description
11752 \begin_inset space ~
11756 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11760 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11765 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11772 cm space between the arrows.
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11777 \begin_inset space ~
11781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11783 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11787 lists the different space sizes.
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11791 \begin_inset Float table
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11804 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11808 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 \begin_inset Tabular
11819 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11820 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11919 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11936 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11947 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11953 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11994 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12153 \begin_inset Index idx
12156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12165 \begin_layout Standard
12166 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12167 feature for adding extra space
12168 in a uniform fashion.
12169 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12170 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12171 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12172 equally between themselves.
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12179 \begin_layout Quote
12181 This is on the left side
12182 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12185 This is on the right
12188 \begin_layout Quote
12191 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12195 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12201 \begin_layout Quote
12204 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12208 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12212 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 That was an example in the
12225 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12229 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12233 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12236 is one in a standard paragraph.
12237 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12241 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12253 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12256 \begin_layout Standard
12258 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12268 \begin_layout Standard
12270 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12282 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12292 \begin_layout Standard
12294 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12298 \begin_inset space ~
12304 \begin_layout Standard
12306 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12308 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12312 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12313 (= opened downwards)
12316 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12320 \begin_inset space ~
12326 \begin_layout Standard
12328 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12330 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12334 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12338 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12342 \begin_inset space ~
12348 \begin_layout Standard
12349 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12361 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12363 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12364 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12368 option in the space dialog.
12376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12380 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12385 \begin_inset Index idx
12388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12398 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12399 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12406 What is correct English?:
12407 \begin_inset Newline newline
12411 \begin_inset Newline newline
12415 \begin_inset space ~
12418 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12419 \begin_inset Newline newline
12423 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12434 \begin_inset Newline newline
12438 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12449 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12457 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12462 \begin_inset space ~
12466 \begin_inset space ~
12470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12474 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12477 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12481 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset space ~
12495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12498 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12507 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12508 That is why it is named
12509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12517 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12518 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12522 \begin_layout Subsection
12524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12526 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12531 \begin_inset Index idx
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12543 \begin_layout Standard
12544 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12547 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12555 There you find the following sizes:
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12571 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12572 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12577 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12580 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12588 \begin_inset Index idx
12591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12592 Document ! Settings
12597 for the paragraph separation.
12598 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12607 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12613 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12622 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12623 size including line spacing.
12628 \begin_layout Standard
12634 \begin_inset Index idx
12637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12643 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12644 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12649 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12650 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12659 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12668 s are described in section
12669 \begin_inset space ~
12673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12675 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12684 If there are several
12688 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12689 You can therefore use
12693 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12696 \begin_layout Standard
12701 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12708 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12715 \begin_layout Standard
12716 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12727 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12739 \begin_layout Subsection
12740 Paragraph Alignment
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Paragraph ! Alignment
12753 \begin_layout Standard
12754 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12759 dialog (toolbar button
12762 arg "layout-paragraph"
12766 There are five possibilities:
12769 \begin_layout Itemize
12777 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12783 \begin_layout Itemize
12791 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12797 \begin_layout Itemize
12805 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12811 \begin_layout Itemize
12819 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12825 \begin_layout Itemize
12833 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12841 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12842 the left and right margins.
12843 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12846 \begin_layout Standard
12848 This paragraph is right aligned,
12851 \begin_layout Standard
12853 this one is centered,
12856 \begin_layout Standard
12858 this one is left aligned.
12861 \begin_layout Subsection
12863 \begin_inset Index idx
12866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12867 Page breaks ! Forced
12873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12875 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12882 \begin_layout Standard
12883 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12884 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12885 force a page break where you want one.
12886 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12887 is good at page breaking.
12888 Only if you use a lot of
12892 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12893 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12896 \begin_layout Standard
12897 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12898 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12902 have to change the page breaking.
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12906 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12908 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12919 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12924 \begin_inset space ~
12929 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12931 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12932 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12935 \begin_layout Standard
12936 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12937 at the top of a page.
12938 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12940 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12941 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12942 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12946 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12950 to learn more about
12957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12961 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12966 \begin_inset Index idx
12969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12970 Page breaks ! Clear
12978 \begin_layout Standard
12979 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12980 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12981 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12982 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12983 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12987 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12990 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12998 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
13000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13001 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13012 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13013 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13014 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13020 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13021 Suppressing Page Breaks
13024 \begin_inset Index idx
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13029 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13033 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13042 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13046 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13051 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13055 \begin_layout Standard
13057 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13058 To discourage page break at
13059 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13061 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13062 certain point you can use
13066 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13068 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13071 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13073 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13080 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13081 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13082 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13083 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13088 \begin_layout Subsection
13090 \begin_inset Index idx
13093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13102 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13109 \begin_layout Standard
13110 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13112 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13129 arg "newline-insert newline"
13133 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13136 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13142 \begin_inset space ~
13150 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13153 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13155 This is useful to avoid
13156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13163 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13167 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13168 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13170 very good at line breaking.
13171 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13172 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13179 reference "sec:Quote"
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "sec:Verse"
13191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13193 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13200 \begin_layout Subsection
13202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13204 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13209 \begin_inset Index idx
13212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13221 \begin_layout Standard
13223 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13234 \begin_layout Standard
13238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13239 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13246 you can insert horizontal lines.
13247 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13248 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13249 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13252 \begin_layout Standard
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13265 \begin_layout Section
13266 Characters and Symbols
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13271 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13272 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13280 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13284 for information on how this is done.
13287 \begin_layout Standard
13288 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13293 dialog via the menu
13295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13296 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13302 \begin_layout Standard
13303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13311 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13312 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13314 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13322 \begin_layout Section
13323 Fonts and Text Styles
13324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13326 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13333 \begin_layout Subsection
13335 \begin_inset Index idx
13338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13348 There are two types of fonts:
13351 \begin_layout Description
13353 \begin_inset space ~
13357 \begin_inset Index idx
13360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13366 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13371 characters) in the font.
13372 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13373 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13374 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13375 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13376 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13377 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13378 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13379 \begin_inset Newline newline
13382 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13383 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13384 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13385 sizes than at small ones.
13386 \begin_inset Newline newline
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13408 \begin_layout Description
13410 \begin_inset space ~
13414 \begin_inset Index idx
13417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13423 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13424 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13425 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13426 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13427 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13428 image manipulation program.
13429 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13430 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13431 \begin_inset space ~
13434 pixels high up to 34
13435 \begin_inset space ~
13438 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13439 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13440 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13442 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13443 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13444 \begin_inset Newline newline
13447 Bitmap fonts are named
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13455 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13458 \begin_layout Standard
13459 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13460 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13461 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13462 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13463 use scalable fonts.
13466 \begin_layout Standard
13467 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13470 \begin_layout Standard
13471 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13473 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13475 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13478 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13479 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13480 font, to emphasize text you use an
13481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13489 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13491 In \SpecialChar LyX
13492 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13496 \begin_layout Subsection
13499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13501 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13508 \begin_layout Standard
13509 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13510 used its own fonts.
13511 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13512 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13515 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13516 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13517 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13518 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13519 to a word processor.
13520 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13521 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13522 files are very portable across
13523 different machines.
13524 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13525 has increased a lot
13526 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13529 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13531 \begin_inset space ~
13535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13537 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13542 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13543 code in the document
13544 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13547 \begin_layout Standard
13548 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 engines that are also able directly
13550 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13552 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13554 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13556 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13557 that is installed on your system.
13558 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13561 \begin_layout Standard
13562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13570 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13571 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13579 \begin_layout Subsection
13580 Document Font and Font size
13581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13583 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13588 \begin_inset Index idx
13591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13598 \begin_inset Index idx
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13610 \begin_layout Standard
13611 You can set the document fonts in the
13613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13617 \begin_inset Index idx
13620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13621 Document ! Settings
13631 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13632 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13635 \begin_inset space ~
13644 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13649 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13652 \begin_layout Standard
13657 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13658 This requires that you use
13670 as the output format, i.
13671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13675 \begin_inset space \space{}
13678 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13679 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13680 installed (see section
13681 \begin_inset space ~
13685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13687 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13692 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13694 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13695 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13697 \begin_inset space ~
13700 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13701 cannot determine the family.
13702 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13703 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13706 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13710 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13711 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13716 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13722 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13724 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13726 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13729 font encoding, this is
13730 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13731 , depending on the document language,
13734 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13735 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13759 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13760 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13782 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13803 European Computer Modern
13806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13814 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13817 \begin_layout Standard
13822 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13823 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13828 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13836 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13842 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13843 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13846 \begin_layout Itemize
13850 \begin_inset space ~
13855 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13868 \begin_inset space ~
13873 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13874 community in order to replace
13878 as the default font.
13879 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13880 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13883 \begin_inset space ~
13896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13897 One difference is improved kerning.
13905 \begin_layout Itemize
13906 If you do not like the look of
13914 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13919 \begin_inset space ~
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13935 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13936 \begin_inset space ~
13939 serif and typewriter fonts,
13943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13944 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13951 \begin_inset space ~
13960 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13965 \begin_inset space \space{}
13973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13977 \begin_inset space \space{}
13983 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_inset space ~
14001 but you can also select your own.
14002 \begin_inset Newline newline
14005 The differences between roman,
14008 \begin_inset space ~
14017 fonts are explained in section
14018 \begin_inset space ~
14022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14024 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14029 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 \begin_inset space ~
14040 was originally designed for newspapers.
14041 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14042 into the small newspaper columns.
14046 \begin_inset space ~
14051 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14055 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14068 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14073 depends on the class you are using.
14074 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14077 \begin_layout Standard
14078 Note that the font size is the
14083 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14084 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14085 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14086 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14089 \begin_inset space ~
14095 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14096 \begin_inset space ~
14100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14102 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14113 \begin_inset space ~
14118 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14120 \begin_inset space ~
14123 serif or typewriter.
14128 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14138 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14141 \begin_layout Standard
14146 LaTeX font encoding
14148 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14149 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14155 \begin_inset Index idx
14158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14166 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14174 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14181 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14182 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14183 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14187 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14195 \begin_layout Standard
14196 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14198 Use Old Style Figures
14202 Use True Small Caps
14205 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14208 Use Old Style Figures
14210 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14212 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14220 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14224 Use True Small Caps
14226 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14227 of scaled capitals.
14228 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14229 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14230 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14234 \begin_layout Standard
14236 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14237 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14238 provided by the font package (or the
14242 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14247 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14253 \begin_layout Standard
14258 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14259 a font to display the script characters.
14263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14264 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14270 \begin_inset Index idx
14273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14280 So this has no effect for the document language
14296 \begin_layout Standard
14299 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14301 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14302 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14308 \begin_inset Index idx
14311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14313 packages ! microtype
14322 \begin_layout Standard
14325 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14327 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14332 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14333 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14339 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14340 \begin_inset space ~
14344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14346 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14356 \begin_layout Standard
14357 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14369 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14374 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14375 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14377 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14379 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14382 dialog, see section
14383 \begin_inset space ~
14387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14389 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14401 \begin_layout Subsection
14405 \begin_layout Standard
14406 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14407 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14409 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14410 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14411 choose a math font in the dialog
14413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14417 \begin_inset Index idx
14420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14421 Document ! Settings
14427 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14428 automatically selects a math font.
14429 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14430 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset space ~
14445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14451 document font is available.
14454 \begin_layout Standard
14455 Note that the math font will not be used for
14459 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14465 or by the insertion of the command
14472 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14473 \begin_inset space ~
14477 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14478 while the math characters do not.
14480 \begin_inset space ~
14483 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14486 \begin_inset space ~
14494 \begin_inset space ~
14499 in the document font settings.
14502 \begin_layout Standard
14503 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14504 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14505 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14506 font (in most cases
14507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset space ~
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14522 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14523 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14531 \begin_inset space ~
14537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14543 \begin_layout Subsection
14545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14555 name "subsec:charstyles"
14562 \begin_inset Index idx
14565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14572 \begin_inset Index idx
14575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14584 \begin_layout Standard
14585 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14586 automatically changes the
14587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14590 style for certain paragraph environments.
14592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14593 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14595 This is where we meet the concept of
14601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14607 \begin_layout Standard
14609 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14629 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14638 e., available with all document classes.
14639 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14643 for specific purposes.
14644 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14647 \begin_layout Standard
14649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14650 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14660 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14664 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14677 — you customized the
14682 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14683 among them, encourage the use of
14695 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14696 \begin_inset space ~
14700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14702 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14707 Rather than fiddling with
14711 , they encourage the use of
14715 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14720 \begin_inset Quotes els
14724 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14727 ), not their form (
14728 \begin_inset Quotes els
14732 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14736 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14737 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14738 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14739 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14740 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14741 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14747 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14751 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14752 With a semantic markup (such as
14756 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14761 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14763 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14764 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14767 \begin_layout Standard
14769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14770 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14771 by \SpecialChar LyX
14777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14780 Builtin Text Styles
14781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14783 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14790 \begin_layout Standard
14792 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14793 The two builtin text styles can be
14794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14803 both of these styles
14806 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14810 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006132
14812 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006135
14814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14820 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14826 \begin_layout Standard
14831 style, do one of the following:
14834 \begin_layout Itemize
14835 click on the toolbar button
14844 \begin_layout Itemize
14845 use the key binding
14852 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14856 \begin_layout Itemize
14858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14862 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006154
14864 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006157
14866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14872 arg "dialog-show character"
14878 arg "dialog-show character"
14882 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006237
14883 as described in section
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14890 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14895 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006263
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14907 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006284
14909 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006284
14913 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006286
14917 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006290
14919 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006291
14923 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006296
14931 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14934 \begin_layout Standard
14935 One typically uses the
14939 style for proper names.
14941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14948 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14958 \begin_layout Standard
14960 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14965 is producing text in
14969 , but the definition can be changed.
14974 \begin_layout Standard
14976 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14978 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14986 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14993 \begin_layout Itemize
14994 clicking on the toolbar button
15003 \begin_layout Itemize
15004 using the keybindings
15011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15015 \begin_layout Itemize
15017 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15021 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006353
15023 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006356
15025 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15029 \change_deleted 34634807 1621007331
15033 arg "dialog-show character"
15037 \change_inserted 34634807 1621007339
15040 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15041 Text Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
15044 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15050 arg "dialog-show character"
15054 \change_deleted 34634807 1621007331
15055 as described in section
15056 \begin_inset space ~
15060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15062 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15067 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006374
15077 \begin_layout Standard
15082 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15084 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15089 packages use a different font
15090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15091 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15097 \begin_layout Standard
15098 We've been using the
15102 style all over the place in this document.
15103 Here's one more example:
15106 \begin_layout Quotation
15110 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15118 \begin_layout Standard
15119 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15120 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15121 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15122 the common tendency to overuse
15123 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15130 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15136 \begin_layout Standard
15138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15139 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15140 only as font changes and integrated in the
15148 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15151 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15167 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15169 \begin_inset space ~
15172 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15178 \change_deleted 34634807 1621007260
15184 arg "dialog-show character"
15188 \change_inserted 34634807 1621007283
15189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15190 Text Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
15197 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15199 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15205 arg "dialog-show character"
15209 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15215 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15219 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15226 \begin_layout Standard
15228 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15229 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15231 \begin_inset space ~
15235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15237 reference "subsec:Modules"
15244 ), or local layout settings (see section
15245 \begin_inset space ~
15249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15251 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15256 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15260 markup for specific functions.
15261 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15266 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15276 \begin_inset Quotes els
15280 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15286 \begin_layout Standard
15288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15289 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15291 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15293 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006495
15295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15301 \begin_layout Standard
15303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15304 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15309 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15310 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15311 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15316 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15317 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15330 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15331 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15332 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15333 \begin_inset Flex Code
15336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15347 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15352 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15361 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15375 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15376 on screen their formal appearance.
15381 \begin_layout Subsection
15383 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15389 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15395 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15403 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15405 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15411 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15416 \begin_inset Index idx
15419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15428 \begin_layout Standard
15429 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15433 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15435 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15437 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15442 the properties of text passages
15443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15447 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15448 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15449 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15450 from ordinary dialog.
15451 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15457 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15458 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15459 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15460 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15461 the properties of the respective text passages.
15466 comes in as a last resort.
15471 \begin_layout Standard
15472 Before we document how to
15473 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15474 use custom character style
15475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15476 tweak the text properties
15478 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15479 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15481 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15485 \begin_inset Newline newline
15488 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15489 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15494 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15495 use custom character styles
15496 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15497 tweak text properties
15500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15505 \begin_inset space ~
15508 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15510 \change_deleted 34634807 1621007210
15516 arg "dialog-show character"
15520 \change_inserted 34634807 1621007233
15523 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15524 Text Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
15530 dialog or press the toolbar button
15533 arg "dialog-show character"
15538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15541 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15542 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15547 property that you can choose.
15548 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15551 \begin_inset space ~
15556 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15558 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15562 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15564 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15569 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15570 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15571 environments all at once.
15574 \begin_layout Standard
15576 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15578 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006625
15582 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006625
15584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15588 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006629
15590 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006628
15595 , and their options (in addition to
15598 \begin_inset space ~
15604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15608 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15616 \begin_layout Labeling
15617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 The possible options are:
15635 \begin_layout Labeling
15636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15641 This is the Roman font family.
15642 Normally a serif font.
15643 It's also the default family.
15653 \begin_layout Labeling
15654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15658 \begin_inset space ~
15665 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15677 \begin_layout Labeling
15678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15685 This is the Typewriter font family.
15691 arg "font-typewriter"
15697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15701 \begin_layout Standard
15703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15704 The general differences of these families are:
15707 \begin_layout Itemize
15709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15714 fonts use characters with serifs.
15715 These are the small
15716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15723 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15724 The following example shows the difference:
15725 \begin_inset Newline newline
15729 \begin_inset Newline newline
15734 text without serifs
15737 \begin_inset Newline newline
15740 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15741 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15748 \begin_layout Itemize
15750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15755 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15756 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15757 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15760 \begin_layout Itemize
15762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15775 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15793 \begin_inset Newline newline
15797 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15815 \begin_inset Note Note
15818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15820 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15821 For more on phantoms see section
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15828 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15838 \begin_inset Newline newline
15847 \begin_layout Labeling
15848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15853 This corresponds to the print weight.
15858 \begin_layout Labeling
15859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15864 This is the Medium font series.
15865 It's also the default series.
15868 \begin_layout Labeling
15869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15876 This is the Bold font series.
15889 \begin_layout Labeling
15890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15895 As the name implies.
15900 \begin_layout Labeling
15901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15906 This is the Upright font shape.
15907 It's also the default shape.
15910 \begin_layout Labeling
15911 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15931 s the Italic font shape
15937 \begin_layout Labeling
15938 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15945 This is the Slanted font shape
15947 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15948 , this is different from italic).
15951 \begin_layout Labeling
15952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15956 \begin_inset space ~
15963 This is the Small caps font shape
15970 \begin_layout Labeling
15971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15973 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15978 Alters the text color.
15979 Note that not all DVI
15980 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15982 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15983 viewers are able to display colors.
15987 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15989 \begin_inset space ~
15993 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15996 , which means that the document default color set in
15998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15999 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16005 \begin_inset space ~
16011 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
16013 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
16015 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
16017 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
16095 \begin_inset Index idx
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16105 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16111 \begin_layout Labeling
16112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16114 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006878
16119 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16120 the language of the document.
16121 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16122 workarea in blue to
16123 indicate the change
16124 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16125 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16127 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006878
16129 \begin_inset Newline newline
16132 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16134 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16135 When using the spell checking (see section
16136 \begin_inset space ~
16140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16142 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16146 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16147 \begin_inset Newline newline
16150 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16152 Exclude from Spellchecking
16155 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16156 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16166 Alters the size of the font.
16168 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16170 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16174 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16177 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16178 document font size.
16179 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16180 the details, but a general description of what
16186 \begin_layout Labeling
16187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16208 arg "font-size tiny"
16214 \begin_layout Labeling
16215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16236 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16242 \begin_layout Labeling
16243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16264 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16270 \begin_layout Labeling
16271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16292 arg "font-size small"
16298 \begin_layout Labeling
16299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16313 It's also the default size.
16317 arg "font-size normal"
16323 \begin_layout Labeling
16324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16345 arg "font-size large"
16351 \begin_layout Labeling
16352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16373 arg "font-size larger"
16379 \begin_layout Labeling
16380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16401 arg "font-size largest"
16407 \begin_layout Labeling
16408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16429 arg "font-size huge"
16435 \begin_layout Labeling
16436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 arg "font-size giant"
16463 \begin_layout Labeling
16464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16469 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16489 arg "font-size increase"
16495 \begin_layout Labeling
16496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16501 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16521 arg "font-size decrease"
16527 \begin_layout Standard
16532 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16533 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16535 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16536 — use those instead.
16537 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16538 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006744
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16545 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006776
16546 Another combo box allows to tweak
16553 \begin_layout Labeling
16554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16556 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006733
16561 Alters the text color.
16562 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16567 , which means that the document default color set in
16569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16570 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16576 \begin_inset space ~
16581 is used, you can select
16658 \begin_inset Index idx
16661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16663 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006733
16674 \begin_layout Labeling
16675 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16677 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16681 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16687 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16688 change a few other things at the character level
16689 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16690 have text passages being underlined
16694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16695 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16696 days, when you could not change fonts.
16697 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16698 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16699 because some people
16703 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16710 \begin_layout Labeling
16711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16713 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16720 This is text with emphasize on
16723 This might seem like the same as
16727 , but it is actually a bit different.
16733 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16735 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16740 \begin_layout Labeling
16741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16743 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16748 Don't use underlining.
16753 \begin_layout Labeling
16754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16756 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16760 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16770 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16779 arg "font-underline"
16785 \begin_inset Newline newline
16789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16792 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16793 when you could not change fonts.
16794 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16795 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16796 because some people
16800 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16805 \begin_layout Labeling
16806 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16810 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16812 \begin_inset space ~
16821 This is text with Double under
16822 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16824 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16833 arg "font-underunderline"
16837 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16839 \begin_inset Newline newline
16842 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16843 about double underbar
16848 \begin_layout Labeling
16849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16853 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16864 This is text with Wavy under
16865 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16876 arg "font-underwave"
16880 \begin_inset Newline newline
16883 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16884 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16890 \begin_layout Labeling
16891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16898 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16904 \begin_layout Labeling
16905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16912 Don't use strikethrough.
16915 \begin_layout Labeling
16916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16920 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16922 \begin_inset space ~
16926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16937 Single strikethrough
16945 arg "font-strikeout"
16949 \begin_inset Newline newline
16952 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16953 changed in the meantime.
16956 \begin_layout Labeling
16957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16963 \begin_inset space ~
16967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16969 \begin_inset space ~
16973 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16983 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16989 \begin_inset Newline newline
16992 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16996 \begin_layout Standard
16998 \change_inserted 34634807 1621007597
16999 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17002 \begin_layout Labeling
17003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17005 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006898
17010 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
17011 the language of the document.
17012 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17013 workarea in blue to
17014 indicate the change.
17015 \begin_inset Newline newline
17018 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17020 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17021 When using the spell checking (see section
17022 \begin_inset space ~
17026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17028 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17032 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17033 \begin_inset Newline newline
17036 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17038 Exclude from Spellchecking
17041 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17047 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17048 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17049 \begin_inset space ~
17053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17055 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17062 \begin_layout Itemize
17064 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17071 This is text with emphasize on
17076 \begin_layout Itemize
17080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17087 This is text with Noun on.
17089 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17096 , this is a logical attribute.
17097 Normally it's equivalent to
17100 \begin_inset space ~
17110 \begin_layout Standard
17111 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17119 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17120 chosen a new character style
17121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17122 applied a text property
17125 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17128 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17130 \begin_inset space ~
17133 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17135 \change_deleted 34634807 1621007136
17141 arg "dialog-show character"
17145 \change_inserted 34634807 1621007171
17148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17149 Text Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
17158 arg "dialog-show character"
17161 ) dialog, the settings are
17162 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17166 You can activate the
17167 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17169 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17170 last applied properties
17172 by using the toolbar button
17175 arg "textstyle-apply"
17179 The button lets you apply
17180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17181 your custom character style
17182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17185 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17187 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17188 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17189 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17190 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17195 \begin_layout Standard
17196 To completely reset the
17197 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17200 text properties of a selection
17202 to the default, use
17203 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17205 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17215 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17220 from the menu of the toolbar button
17223 arg "textstyle-apply"
17230 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17231 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17232 you just set the shape to
17233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17251 \begin_inset space ~
17265 \begin_layout Standard
17267 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17268 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17276 \begin_inset space ~
17288 \begin_layout Itemize
17290 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17303 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17321 \begin_inset Newline newline
17325 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17339 \begin_inset Note Note
17342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17343 For more on phantoms see section
17344 \begin_inset space ~
17348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17350 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17360 \begin_inset Newline newline
17366 \begin_layout Itemize
17368 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17373 fonts use characters with serifs.
17374 These are the small
17375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17382 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17383 The following example shows the difference:
17384 \begin_inset Newline newline
17388 \begin_inset Newline newline
17393 text without serifs
17396 \begin_inset Newline newline
17399 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17400 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17407 \begin_layout Itemize
17409 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17414 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17415 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17416 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17421 \begin_layout Standard
17423 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17431 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17432 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17435 \begin_inset space ~
17440 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17441 the property to be removed.
17442 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17443 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17444 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17462 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17463 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17471 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17475 \begin_inset space ~
17480 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17491 If you, for example, set
17492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17510 \begin_inset space ~
17515 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17524 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17529 \begin_layout Standard
17531 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17534 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17535 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17538 \begin_layout Section
17539 Printing and Previewing
17542 \begin_layout Subsection
17546 \begin_layout Standard
17547 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17548 using \SpecialChar LyX
17549 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17550 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17551 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17552 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17554 Additional Features
17559 \begin_layout Standard
17561 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17564 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17565 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17566 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17569 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17570 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17571 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17572 to turn your writing into printable output.
17573 This happens in two stages:
17576 \begin_layout Enumerate
17577 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17578 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17580 a file with the extension,
17581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17595 \begin_layout Enumerate
17596 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17597 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 to use the commands in the
17602 file to produce printable output.
17605 \begin_layout Subsection
17606 Output file formats
17607 \begin_inset Index idx
17610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17619 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17628 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17630 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17634 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17638 \begin_inset Index idx
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17643 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17645 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17656 \begin_layout Standard
17657 This file type has the extension
17658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17670 It contains your document as plain text
17671 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17673 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17674 following the rules of the
17675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17678 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17687 \begin_layout Standard
17688 You can export your document to
17689 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17691 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17696 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17697 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17705 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17706 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17707 bibliography (section
17708 \begin_inset space ~
17712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17714 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17719 If your document includes such material, use
17721 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17722 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17724 \begin_inset space ~
17728 \begin_inset space ~
17732 \begin_inset space ~
17740 \begin_inset space ~
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17750 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17751 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17752 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17754 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17763 \begin_inset Index idx
17766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17776 \begin_layout Standard
17777 This file type has the extension
17778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17789 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17792 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17793 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17794 -Errors or to process it manually
17795 with console commands.
17796 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17797 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17798 's temporary directory whenever you
17799 view or export your document.
17802 \begin_layout Standard
17803 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17804 -file using the menu
17806 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17807 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17811 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17812 export variants are explained in section
17813 \begin_inset space ~
17817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17819 reference "subsec:Export"
17826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17828 \begin_inset Index idx
17831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17840 \begin_layout Standard
17841 This file type has the extension
17842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17862 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17863 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17864 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17868 \begin_layout Standard
17869 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17870 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17871 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17872 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17873 when you view the DVI.
17874 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17877 \begin_layout Standard
17878 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17880 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17881 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17886 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17887 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17889 \begin_inset space ~
17895 The latter option uses the program
17897 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17903 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17906 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17907 font access (see section
17908 \begin_inset space ~
17912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17914 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17919 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17920 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17927 \begin_inset Index idx
17930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17931 File formats ! PostScript
17939 \begin_layout Standard
17940 This file type has the extension
17941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17953 PostScript was developed by the company
17957 as a printer language.
17958 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17960 PostScript can be seen as a
17961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17964 programming language
17965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17968 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17973 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17985 packages ! pstricks
17995 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17998 \begin_layout Standard
17999 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18003 Encapsulated PostScript
18004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18007 (EPS, file extension
18008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18020 As \SpecialChar LyX
18021 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
18022 convert them in the background to EPS.
18023 If, for example, you have 50
18024 \begin_inset space ~
18027 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18029 \begin_inset space ~
18032 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18033 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18035 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18036 EPS to avoid this problem.
18039 \begin_layout Standard
18040 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18042 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18043 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18051 \begin_inset Index idx
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 \begin_inset Index idx
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 \begin_layout Standard
18074 This file type has the extension
18075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18091 Portable Document Format
18092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18099 was derived from PostScript.
18100 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18109 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18110 looks exactly the same.
18113 \begin_layout Standard
18114 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18118 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18122 (JPG, file extension
18123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18150 Portable Network Graphics
18151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18154 (PNG, file extension
18155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18167 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18168 converts them in the
18169 background to one of these formats.
18170 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18171 will slow down your workflow.
18172 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18175 \begin_layout Standard
18176 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18178 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18184 \begin_layout Description
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18189 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18193 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18196 \begin_layout Description
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18205 ) This uses the program
18207 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18210 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18213 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18216 is a new engine, derived from
18220 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18221 access (see section
18222 \begin_inset space ~
18226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18228 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18233 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18234 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18239 \begin_layout Description
18241 \begin_inset space ~
18248 ) This uses the program
18253 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18259 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18260 font access (see section
18261 \begin_inset space ~
18265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18267 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18272 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18273 vertically written Japanese.
18276 \begin_layout Description
18278 \begin_inset space ~
18281 (cropped) This is the same as
18284 \begin_inset space ~
18289 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18290 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18291 to generate good-looking
18292 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18295 \begin_layout Description
18297 \begin_inset space ~
18300 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18304 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18308 \begin_layout Description
18310 \begin_inset space ~
18313 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18317 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18318 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18322 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18323 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18326 \begin_layout Standard
18330 \begin_inset space ~
18339 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18340 works without problems.
18341 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18342 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18346 \begin_inset space ~
18354 \begin_inset space ~
18359 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18369 \begin_inset Index idx
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18373 FileFormats ! XHTML
18379 \begin_inset Index idx
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18392 This file type has the extension
18393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18405 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18406 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18407 When \SpecialChar LyX
18408 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18409 suitable for the purpose.
18410 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18413 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 between different formats, which are described in section
18418 Math Output in XHTML
18423 \begin_inset space ~
18431 \begin_layout Standard
18432 XHTML output remains
18433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18440 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18441 features are supported yet.
18445 and the World Wide Web
18449 Additional Features
18451 manual, for more information.
18454 \begin_layout Standard
18455 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18457 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18458 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18464 \begin_layout Subsection
18466 \begin_inset Index idx
18469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18478 \begin_layout Standard
18479 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18480 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18489 or use the toolbar button
18496 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18497 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18498 \begin_inset space ~
18502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18504 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18508 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18510 \begin_inset space ~
18514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18516 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18521 Further output formats can be selected via
18523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18524 View (Other Formats)
18526 or the toolbar button
18535 \begin_layout Standard
18536 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18537 viewer window using the menu
18539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18545 Update (Other Formats)
18550 \begin_layout Standard
18551 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18554 To have a real output, export your document.
18557 \begin_layout Section
18558 A few Words about Typography
18559 \begin_inset Index idx
18562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18571 \begin_layout Subsection
18572 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18573 \begin_inset Index idx
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18583 \begin_inset Index idx
18586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18595 \begin_layout Standard
18596 In \SpecialChar LyX
18598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18609 symbol comes in four variants: the
18626 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18632 \begin_layout Standard
18633 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18643 height_special "totalheight"
18648 backgroundcolor "none"
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18652 \begin_inset Tabular
18653 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18654 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18655 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18656 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18657 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18658 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18659 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18687 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18688 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18727 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 system key combination
18754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18755 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18767 and the em dash with
18770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18783 is the Mac label for the right
18793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18806 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18807 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 system key combination or
18830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18844 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18857 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18896 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18902 \begin_layout Standard
18903 Dashes can also be inserted with
18905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18907 \begin_inset space ~
18910 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18918 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18919 and 2014 for the en dash).
18922 \begin_layout Standard
18923 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18924 mode and has a length of its own.
18925 Here are some examples:
18928 \begin_layout Enumerate
18929 line- and page-breaks
18930 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18940 \begin_layout Enumerate
18942 \begin_inset space ~
18946 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18956 \begin_layout Enumerate
18957 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18958 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18968 \begin_layout Enumerate
18969 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18983 \begin_layout Standard
18985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18987 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18988 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18996 \begin_layout Subsection
18997 Dashes and Line Breaks
18998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19000 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19007 \begin_layout Standard
19008 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
19009 case and locale, e.
19010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19016 \begin_layout Itemize
19017 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
19018 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19021 \begin_layout Itemize
19022 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
19026 \begin_layout Itemize
19027 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19028 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19031 \begin_layout Standard
19032 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19033 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19044 allows line breaks after hyphens
19045 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19047 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19050 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19053 \begin_layout Enumerate
19054 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19058 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19060 The Elements of Typographic Style
19063 \begin_inset space ~
19066 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
19069 \begin_layout Enumerate
19070 Unwanted line breaks
19075 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19077 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19080 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19087 Prevent Hyphenation
19092 \begin_inset space ~
19108 in \SpecialChar TeX
19110 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19111 , a protected space does not suffice
19115 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19123 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19124 in the document language.
19125 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19139 \begin_layout Itemize
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19155 height_special "totalheight"
19160 backgroundcolor "none"
19163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 \begin_layout Itemize
19174 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19184 height_special "totalheight"
19189 backgroundcolor "none"
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 \begin_inset space ~
19202 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19203 \begin_inset space ~
19206 – sont très utiles.
19209 \begin_layout Itemize
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19223 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19228 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19232 – in contrast to an overfull line
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19236 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19240 \begin_layout Standard
19241 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19245 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19246 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19247 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19252 \begin_layout Enumerate
19253 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19254 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
19255 or \SpecialChar TeX
19261 \begin_layout Itemize
19263 \begin_inset space ~
19266 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19267 \begin_inset space ~
19270 – sont très utiles.
19274 \begin_layout Enumerate
19275 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19276 \begin_inset Newline newline
19281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19282 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19284 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19286 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19288 \begin_inset space ~
19294 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19296 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19298 \begin_inset space ~
19309 \begin_layout Itemize
19310 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19311 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19312 should be followed by
19313 a line break opportunity.
19316 \begin_layout Standard
19317 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19318 \begin_inset space ~
19322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19324 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19335 \begin_layout Enumerate
19336 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19337 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19338 or en dashes (see section
19339 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19345 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19355 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19356 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19359 \begin_layout Standard
19360 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19365 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19366 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19375 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19376 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19384 \begin_layout Standard
19385 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19387 \begin_inset space ~
19390 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19392 prevents ligation to dashes.
19394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19401 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19406 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19407 after the input (unless the current text font is
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 The behavior was changed since
19417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19432 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19433 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19434 as non-breakable dashes.
19435 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19443 \begin_layout Standard
19446 \begin_inset space ~
19454 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19456 \begin_inset space ~
19459 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19462 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19463 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19464 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19465 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19467 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19471 If you used both literal and
19472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19479 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19481 \begin_inset space ~
19484 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19485 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19488 \begin_layout Subsection
19490 \begin_inset Index idx
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19502 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19509 \begin_layout Standard
19510 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19511 but automatically in the output.
19512 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19518 \begin_inset Index idx
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 following the rules of the document language.
19530 does not hyphenate text in the
19534 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19537 \begin_layout Standard
19539 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19543 font and with unusual constructs, like
19544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19552 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19553 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19554 This is done with the menu
19556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19557 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19559 \begin_inset space ~
19565 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19567 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19571 \begin_layout Standard
19572 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19573 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19584 would then see the hyphen
19585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19592 as a line break possibility.
19593 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19594 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19598 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19601 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19603 Prevent Hyphenation
19608 \begin_inset space ~
19616 \begin_layout Subsection
19618 \begin_inset Index idx
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19631 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19634 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19641 \begin_layout Standard
19642 When \SpecialChar LyX
19643 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19644 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19646 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19652 appropriate amount of space.
19653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19656 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19658 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19659 gets after another word.
19662 \begin_layout Standard
19663 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19664 not work in all cases.
19666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19677 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19678 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19681 \begin_layout Standard
19682 Here are some examples of
19686 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19689 \begin_layout Itemize
19694 \begin_layout Itemize
19699 \begin_layout Standard
19700 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19703 \begin_layout Itemize
19705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19709 this is too much space!
19712 \begin_layout Itemize
19717 \begin_layout Standard
19718 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19721 \begin_layout Standard
19722 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19725 \begin_layout Enumerate
19729 \begin_inset space ~
19734 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19735 \begin_inset space ~
19739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19741 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19746 \begin_inset Index idx
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 Spaces ! inter-word
19758 \begin_layout Enumerate
19762 \begin_inset space ~
19767 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19768 \begin_inset space ~
19772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19774 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19779 \begin_inset Index idx
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 \begin_layout Enumerate
19795 \begin_inset space ~
19799 \begin_inset space ~
19803 \begin_inset space ~
19810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19812 \begin_inset space ~
19817 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19818 This function is also bound to
19821 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19827 \begin_layout Standard
19828 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19831 \begin_layout Itemize
19833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19837 \begin_inset space \space{}
19840 this is too much space!
19843 \begin_layout Itemize
19844 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19848 \begin_layout Standard
19849 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19850 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19852 will take care of this.
19855 \begin_layout Standard
19856 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19860 \begin_inset space ~
19866 feature described in the section
19868 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19873 Additional Features
19878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19880 \begin_inset Index idx
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 Typography ! Quotation marks
19890 \begin_inset Index idx
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 Quotation marks | see
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 \begin_layout Standard
19926 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19927 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19928 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19938 The keyboard character,
19942 , generates this automatically.
19945 \begin_layout Standard
19946 You can specify what character the
19950 key produces by using the submenu
19956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19960 \begin_inset Index idx
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 Document ! Settings
19969 dialog and switching the
19973 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19974 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19976 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19978 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19982 \begin_inset space ~
19988 \begin_layout Labeling
19989 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20001 \begin_inset space ~
20005 \begin_inset space ~
20009 \begin_inset Quotes els
20013 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20027 \begin_inset Quotes els
20031 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20034 quotation marks (as common, e.
20035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20041 \begin_layout Labeling
20042 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20045 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20049 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20053 \begin_inset space ~
20057 \begin_inset space ~
20061 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20065 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20071 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20075 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20079 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20083 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20086 quotation marks (as common, e.
20087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20093 \begin_layout Labeling
20094 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20097 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20105 \begin_inset space ~
20109 \begin_inset space ~
20113 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20117 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20123 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20127 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20131 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20135 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20138 quotation marks (as common, e.
20139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20145 \begin_layout Labeling
20146 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20149 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20153 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20157 \begin_inset space ~
20161 \begin_inset space ~
20165 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20169 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20175 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20179 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20183 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20187 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20190 quotation marks (as common, e.
20191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20197 \begin_layout Labeling
20198 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20201 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20205 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20209 \begin_inset space ~
20213 \begin_inset space ~
20217 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20221 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20227 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20231 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20235 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20239 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20242 quotation marks (as common, e.
20243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20246 g., in Switzerland)
20249 \begin_layout Labeling
20250 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20253 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20257 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20261 \begin_inset space ~
20265 \begin_inset space ~
20269 \begin_inset Quotes als
20273 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20279 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20283 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20287 \begin_inset Quotes als
20291 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20294 quotation marks (as common, e.
20295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20301 \begin_layout Labeling
20302 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20305 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20309 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20313 \begin_inset space ~
20317 \begin_inset space ~
20321 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20325 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20331 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20335 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20339 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20343 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20346 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20349 \begin_layout Labeling
20350 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20353 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20357 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20361 \begin_inset space ~
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20369 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20373 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20379 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20383 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20387 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20391 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20394 quotation marks (as common, e.
20395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20398 g., in Great Britain)
20401 \begin_layout Labeling
20402 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20405 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20409 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20413 \begin_inset space ~
20417 \begin_inset space ~
20421 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20425 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20431 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20435 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20439 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20443 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20446 quotation marks (as common, e.
20447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20453 \begin_layout Labeling
20454 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20457 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20461 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20465 \begin_inset space ~
20469 \begin_inset space ~
20473 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20477 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20483 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20487 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20491 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20495 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20498 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20503 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20504 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20505 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20506 the inner marks differ).
20514 \begin_layout Labeling
20515 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20518 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20522 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20526 \begin_inset space ~
20530 \begin_inset space ~
20534 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20538 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20544 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20548 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20552 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20556 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20559 quotation marks (as common, e.
20560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20566 \begin_layout Labeling
20567 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20570 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20574 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20578 \begin_inset space ~
20582 \begin_inset space ~
20586 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20590 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20596 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20600 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20604 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20608 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20611 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20612 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20616 \begin_layout Labeling
20617 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20619 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20622 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20626 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20630 \begin_inset space ~
20634 \begin_inset space ~
20638 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20642 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20650 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20658 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20666 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20674 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20679 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20684 \begin_layout Labeling
20685 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20686 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20694 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20700 \begin_inset space ~
20704 \begin_inset space ~
20710 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20718 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20722 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20726 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20730 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20734 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20737 quotation marks (as common, e.
20738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20750 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20756 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20757 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20765 \begin_layout Labeling
20766 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20767 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20775 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20781 \begin_inset space ~
20785 \begin_inset space ~
20791 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20799 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20803 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20807 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20811 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20815 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20818 quotation marks (as common, e.
20819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20822 g., in North Korea and China)
20823 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20825 \begin_inset script superscript
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20832 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20847 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20854 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20864 \begin_layout Standard
20865 Inner quotation marks
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20871 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20872 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20880 does not necessarily mean
20881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20889 This is why we call them
20890 \begin_inset Quotes els
20894 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20910 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20912 \begin_inset Quotes els
20916 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20919 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20922 arg "quote-insert inner"
20927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20933 \begin_layout Standard
20934 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20935 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20936 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20937 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20938 If you check the setting
20940 Use dynamic quotation marks
20944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20945 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20948 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20949 they appear in a special color).
20950 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20951 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20956 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20959 \begin_layout Standard
20960 Individual quotation marks (i.
20961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20964 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20965 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20969 \begin_layout Subsection
20971 \begin_inset Index idx
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 Typography ! Ligatures
20981 \begin_inset Index idx
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21015 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21022 \begin_layout Standard
21023 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
21024 print them as single characters.
21025 These groups are known as
21030 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21031 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21033 Here are the standard ligatures:
21036 \begin_layout Itemize
21040 \begin_layout Itemize
21044 \begin_layout Itemize
21048 \begin_layout Itemize
21052 \begin_layout Itemize
21056 \begin_layout Standard
21057 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21060 \begin_layout Standard
21061 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21062 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21070 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21086 To break a ligature, use
21088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21089 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21091 \begin_inset space ~
21098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21109 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21126 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21134 \begin_layout Subsection
21136 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21138 \begin_inset Index idx
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 \begin_layout Standard
21154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21155 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21159 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21162 \begin_layout Description
21164 The name of the game.
21167 \begin_layout Description
21169 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21173 \begin_layout Description
21175 The \SpecialChar TeX
21176 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21180 \begin_layout Description
21181 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21182 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21186 \begin_layout Standard
21187 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21193 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21201 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21202 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21203 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21204 converges to the number
21205 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21208 : The actual version is
21209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21217 , the previous one was
21218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21229 \begin_layout Subsection
21231 \begin_inset Index idx
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 \begin_layout Standard
21244 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21245 space between two words.
21246 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21256 for units use the menu
21258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21259 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21261 \begin_inset space ~
21269 arg "space-insert thin"
21275 \begin_layout Standard
21276 Here is an example to show the differences:
21279 \begin_layout Standard
21280 \begin_inset Tabular
21281 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21282 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21283 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21284 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21295 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 space between number and unit
21314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21323 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 half space between number and unit
21348 \begin_layout Subsection
21350 \begin_inset Index idx
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21362 \begin_layout Standard
21363 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21365 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21366 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21367 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21368 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21369 These bits of text became known as
21380 \begin_layout Standard
21381 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21382 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21383 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21384 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21385 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21386 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21387 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21388 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21389 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21390 \begin_inset Newline newline
21398 \begin_inset Newline newline
21406 \begin_inset Newline newline
21409 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21410 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21411 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21413 \begin_inset space ~
21417 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21419 key "latexcompanion"
21425 \begin_inset space ~
21429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21436 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21437 's page break mechanism.
21440 \begin_layout Chapter
21441 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21444 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21451 \begin_layout Standard
21452 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21455 \begin_inset space ~
21461 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21464 \begin_layout Section
21466 \begin_inset Index idx
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21485 \begin_layout Standard
21487 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21490 \begin_layout Description
21493 \begin_inset space ~
21496 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21497 \begin_inset Newline newline
21501 \begin_inset Note Note
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21513 \begin_layout Description
21514 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21515 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21516 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21520 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21522 \begin_inset space ~
21528 \begin_inset Newline newline
21532 \begin_inset Note Comment
21535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21545 \begin_layout Description
21547 \begin_inset space ~
21550 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21551 set in the document settings under
21553 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21555 \begin_inset space ~
21561 \begin_inset Newline newline
21565 \begin_inset Newline newline
21569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21579 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21584 of a comment that appears in the output.
21590 \begin_inset Newline newline
21594 \begin_inset Newline newline
21597 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21600 \begin_layout Standard
21601 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21613 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21616 \begin_layout Section
21618 \begin_inset Index idx
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21630 name "sec:Footnotes"
21637 \begin_layout Standard
21639 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21645 or the toolbar button
21648 arg "footnote-insert"
21660 \begin_inset Graphics
21661 filename clipart/footnote.png
21670 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21671 's representation of your footnote.
21681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21700 label, the box will
21704 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21705 Clicking on the box label again will close
21718 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21719 and click on the footnote
21734 \begin_layout Standard
21735 Here is an example footnote:
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21752 \begin_layout Standard
21753 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21754 position where the footnote box is placed.
21755 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21756 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21757 according to the document class.
21759 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21760 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21766 ey are described in the
21769 \begin_inset space ~
21777 \begin_layout Section
21779 \begin_inset Index idx
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21791 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21798 \begin_layout Standard
21799 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21801 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21805 \begin_inset space ~
21810 or the toolbar button
21813 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21839 appearing within your text.
21840 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21841 's representation of your margin
21850 \begin_layout Standard
21851 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21855 \begin_inset Marginal
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 This is a marginal note.
21868 \begin_layout Standard
21869 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21870 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21871 pages, right on odd pages.
21874 \begin_layout Standard
21875 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21878 \begin_inset space ~
21886 \begin_inset space ~
21894 \begin_layout Section
21895 Graphics and Images
21896 \begin_inset Index idx
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 \begin_inset Index idx
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21918 name "sec:Graphics"
21925 \begin_layout Standard
21926 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21927 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21930 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21939 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21942 \begin_layout Standard
21943 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21948 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21949 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21951 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21952 \begin_inset space ~
21956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21958 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21965 \begin_layout Standard
21970 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21971 of the image in the output.
21972 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21976 \begin_inset space ~
21980 \begin_inset space ~
21989 \begin_inset space ~
21993 \begin_inset space ~
21997 \begin_inset space ~
22002 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22003 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
22011 \begin_layout Standard
22015 \begin_inset space ~
22019 \begin_inset space ~
22024 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22025 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22027 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22032 \begin_inset space ~
22037 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22038 with the image size is printed.
22041 \begin_layout Standard
22042 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22043 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22045 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22048 \begin_layout Standard
22050 \begin_inset Graphics
22051 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22059 \begin_layout Standard
22060 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22061 the image into a float, see section
22062 \begin_inset space ~
22066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22068 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22075 \begin_layout Subsection
22077 \begin_inset Index idx
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22089 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22096 \begin_layout Standard
22097 You can insert images in any known file format.
22098 But as we explained in section
22099 \begin_inset space ~
22103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22105 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22109 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22111 therefore uses the program
22115 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22116 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22117 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22118 \begin_inset space ~
22122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22124 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22131 \begin_layout Standard
22132 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22135 \begin_layout Description
22137 \begin_inset space ~
22140 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22141 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22142 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22146 Graphics Interchange Format
22147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22150 (GIF, file extension
22151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22163 \begin_inset Index idx
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22198 Portable Network Graphics
22199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22202 (PNG, file extension
22203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22215 \begin_inset Index idx
22218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22250 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22254 (JPG, file extension
22255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22279 \begin_inset Index idx
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_layout Description
22315 \begin_inset space ~
22318 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22320 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22321 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22322 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22323 \begin_inset Newline newline
22326 Scalable image formats can be
22327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22330 Scalable Vector Graphics
22331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22334 (SVG, file extension
22335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22347 \begin_inset Index idx
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22382 Encapsulated PostScript
22383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22386 (EPS, file extension
22387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22399 \begin_inset Index idx
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22434 Portable Document Format
22435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22438 (PDF, file extension
22439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22451 \begin_inset Index idx
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22469 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22470 result will not be scalable.
22471 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22485 \begin_layout Standard
22486 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22493 \begin_layout Subsection
22494 Grouping of Image Settings
22495 \begin_inset Index idx
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 Images ! Settings grouping
22507 \begin_layout Standard
22508 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22510 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22511 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22513 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22514 need to manually change each of them.
22517 \begin_layout Standard
22518 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22521 \begin_inset space ~
22525 \begin_inset space ~
22537 \begin_inset space ~
22541 \begin_inset space ~
22547 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22548 and checking the name of the desired group.
22551 \begin_layout Section
22553 \begin_inset Index idx
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22572 \begin_layout Standard
22573 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22576 arg "tabular-insert"
22581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22585 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22586 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22587 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22590 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22591 from the rest of the table.
22592 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22593 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22595 Here is an example table:
22598 \begin_layout Standard
22600 \begin_inset Tabular
22601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22602 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22804 \begin_layout Standard
22806 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22807 This corresponds to the
22808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22815 table style listed in the style selection.
22818 \begin_layout Standard
22820 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22821 Other available styles include:
22824 \begin_layout Itemize
22826 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22835 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22839 \begin_layout Itemize
22841 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22842 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22845 \begin_layout Itemize
22847 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22856 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22857 bold top/bottom lines (see
22868 \begin_layout Standard
22870 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22871 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22872 button can be changed in
22874 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22875 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22879 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22883 \begin_layout Subsection
22887 \begin_layout Standard
22888 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22891 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22895 This brings up the table dialog.
22896 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22897 cursor is placed currently.
22898 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22899 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22900 done on all of your selection.
22903 \begin_layout Standard
22904 In addition to the table dialog, the
22907 \begin_inset space ~
22912 helps you in setting table properties.
22913 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22916 \begin_layout Standard
22920 \begin_inset space ~
22925 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22926 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22927 current cell respectively.
22928 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22930 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22931 of text, see section
22932 \begin_inset space ~
22936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22938 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22945 \begin_layout Standard
22946 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22947 using the check box
22956 This will merge the cells to
22960 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22961 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22962 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22963 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22964 in the last row without the upper border:
22967 \begin_layout Standard
22969 \begin_inset Tabular
22970 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22971 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22972 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22973 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22974 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 \begin_layout Standard
23107 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23108 -arguments for the table.
23109 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23110 explained in the chapter
23117 \begin_inset space ~
23123 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23124 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23125 but are visible in the output.
23128 \begin_layout Standard
23129 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 Most DVI-viewers are
23141 able to display rotations.
23149 \begin_layout Standard
23154 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23159 adds lines for all cell borders.
23162 \begin_layout Subsection
23164 \begin_inset Index idx
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 Tables ! Multi-page
23174 \begin_inset Index idx
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23186 \begin_layout Standard
23187 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23190 \begin_inset space ~
23194 \begin_inset space ~
23202 \begin_inset space ~
23207 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23208 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23211 \begin_layout Description
23216 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23217 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23218 Except for the first page, if
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23229 \begin_layout Description
23233 \begin_inset space ~
23238 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23239 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23242 \begin_layout Description
23247 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23248 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23249 except for the last page, if
23252 \begin_inset space ~
23260 \begin_layout Description
23264 \begin_inset space ~
23269 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23270 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23273 \begin_layout Description
23274 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23275 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23281 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23284 \begin_inset space ~
23292 \begin_layout Standard
23293 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23294 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23295 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23301 In this context, first means first in this order:
23304 \begin_inset space ~
23316 \begin_inset space ~
23321 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23324 \begin_layout Standard
23326 \begin_inset Tabular
23327 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23328 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23329 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23330 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23331 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23332 <row endfirsthead="true">
23333 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23363 <row endfirsthead="true">
23364 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <row endhead="true">
23397 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <row endhead="true">
23428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23439 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <row endfoot="true">
23461 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24453 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25226 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 <row endlastfoot="true">
25443 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25463 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 \begin_layout Subsection
25482 \begin_inset Index idx
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25494 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25501 \begin_layout Standard
25502 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25503 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25504 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25505 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25509 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25512 \begin_layout Standard
25513 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25514 for the column in the table dialog.
25515 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25516 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25520 \begin_layout Standard
25522 \begin_inset Tabular
25523 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25524 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25525 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25526 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25527 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25547 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25616 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25672 This is longer now.
25677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25729 This is longer now.
25734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25760 \begin_layout Standard
25761 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25762 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25767 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25768 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25773 Selection with the mouse or with
25777 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25778 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25779 the selection from outside the table.
25782 \begin_layout Section
25784 \begin_inset Index idx
25787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25803 \begin_layout Subsection
25807 \begin_layout Standard
25808 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25809 have a fixed location.
25811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25818 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25826 \begin_inset space ~
25831 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25832 too many notes on the current page.
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25836 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25837 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25838 and pages without text.
25839 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25840 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25841 Floats are therefore numbered.
25842 Referencing is described in section
25843 \begin_inset space ~
25847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25849 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25856 \begin_layout Standard
25857 To insert a float, use the menu
25859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25863 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25864 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25866 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25867 \begin_inset Index idx
25870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25876 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25877 paragraph within the float.
25878 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25879 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25880 left-clicking on the box label.
25881 A closed float box looks like this:
25882 \begin_inset Graphics
25883 filename clipart/float.png
25888 – a gray button with a red label.
25891 \begin_layout Standard
25892 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25894 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25897 \begin_layout Subsection
25899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25901 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25906 \begin_inset Index idx
25909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25910 Floats ! Figure floats
25918 \begin_layout Standard
25920 \begin_inset space ~
25924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25926 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25930 was created using the menu
25932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25933 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25939 arg "float-insert figure"
25943 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25952 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25956 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25957 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25961 \begin_inset space ~
25969 arg "layout-paragraph"
25975 \begin_layout Standard
25976 \begin_inset Float figure
25983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25985 \begin_inset Graphics
25986 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25996 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26001 name "fig:A-star-in"
26018 \begin_layout Standard
26019 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
26020 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26031 ) and refer to it using the menu
26033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26039 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26043 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26044 vague references like
26045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26052 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26053 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26063 For more about cross-references, see section
26064 \begin_inset space ~
26068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26070 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26078 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26079 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26080 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26081 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26082 as described in section
26083 \begin_inset space ~
26087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26089 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26095 \begin_inset space ~
26099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26101 reference "fig:Two-images"
26105 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26106 You can also set the images one below the other.
26108 \begin_inset space ~
26112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26114 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26121 reference "fig:Star"
26125 are the subfigures.
26128 \begin_layout Standard
26129 \begin_inset Float figure
26136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26137 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26141 \begin_inset Float figure
26148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26149 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26154 name "fig:Undefinable"
26166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26167 \begin_inset Graphics
26168 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26180 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26184 \begin_inset Float figure
26191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26192 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26210 \begin_inset Graphics
26211 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26223 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26235 name "fig:Two-images"
26252 \begin_layout Subsection
26254 \begin_inset Index idx
26257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26258 Floats ! Table floats
26266 \begin_layout Standard
26267 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26270 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26273 or the toolbar button
26276 arg "float-insert table"
26280 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26281 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26282 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26284 \begin_inset space ~
26288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26290 reference "tab:Table-float"
26297 \begin_layout Standard
26298 \begin_inset Float table
26305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26311 name "tab:Table-float"
26323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26325 \begin_inset Tabular
26326 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26327 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26328 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26329 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26330 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26481 \end{array}\right]$
26489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26502 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26523 \begin_layout Subsection
26525 \begin_inset Index idx
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26537 \begin_layout Standard
26539 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26540 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26541 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26543 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26559 \begin_layout Section
26561 \begin_inset Index idx
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26573 \begin_layout Standard
26575 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26577 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26578 \begin_inset space \space{}
26584 \begin_layout Standard
26585 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26586 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26592 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26593 and its alignment within the page.
26596 \begin_layout Standard
26598 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26608 height_special "totalheight"
26613 backgroundcolor "none"
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26619 This is a minipage.
26620 The text is set in an italic style.
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26627 another formatting.
26635 \begin_layout Standard
26636 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26639 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26643 as described in section
26644 \begin_inset space ~
26648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26650 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26655 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26661 \begin_layout Standard
26662 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26672 height_special "totalheight"
26677 backgroundcolor "none"
26680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26681 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26682 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26688 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26692 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26702 height_special "totalheight"
26707 backgroundcolor "none"
26710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26712 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26720 \begin_layout Standard
26721 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26727 \begin_layout Standard
26728 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26730 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26737 \begin_inset space ~
26745 \begin_layout Chapter
26746 Mathematical Formulas
26747 \begin_inset Index idx
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26757 \begin_inset Index idx
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26791 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26798 \begin_layout Standard
26799 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26804 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26807 \begin_layout Section
26809 \begin_inset Index idx
26812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 \begin_layout Standard
26822 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26835 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26837 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26838 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26839 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26848 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26852 \begin_inset space ~
26857 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26860 \begin_layout Standard
26861 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26862 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26865 \begin_layout Standard
26866 This is a line with an inline formula
26867 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26873 \begin_layout Standard
26874 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26875 paragraph, like this one:
26876 \begin_inset Formula
26883 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26888 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26890 For example, typing
26891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26904 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26905 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26909 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26912 \begin_inset space ~
26920 \begin_layout Subsection
26921 Navigating in Formulas
26922 \begin_inset Index idx
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26934 \begin_layout Standard
26935 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26936 achieved with the arrow keys.
26938 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26939 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26944 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26945 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26949 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26953 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26956 \end{array}\right]$
26964 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26969 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26970 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26973 \begin_layout Standard
26978 , printed in this document as
26979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26983 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26990 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26991 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26992 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26997 For example, if you want
26998 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27006 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27016 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27020 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27025 , since in the latter case only the
27028 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27033 will be under the square root sign:
27034 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27040 \begin_layout Standard
27041 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27043 \begin_inset Formula
27045 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27054 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27055 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27058 \begin_layout Subsection
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27063 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27064 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27068 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27069 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27070 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27071 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27072 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27076 \begin_layout Subsection
27077 Exponents and Subscripts
27078 \begin_inset Index idx
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27088 \begin_inset Index idx
27091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 \begin_layout Standard
27101 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27104 arg "math-superscript"
27110 arg "math-subscript"
27113 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27115 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27118 , type in a formula
27121 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27131 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27137 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27141 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27147 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27153 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27162 , you have to use an extra
27166 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27167 For example, if you want
27168 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27174 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27180 Subscripts are similar: To get
27181 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27187 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27195 \begin_layout Subsection
27197 \begin_inset Index idx
27200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27209 \begin_layout Standard
27210 Create a fraction either with the command
27216 or by using the icon
27219 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27225 \begin_inset space ~
27231 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27232 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27233 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27238 To move back up, press
27243 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27244 \begin_inset Formula
27246 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27249 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27257 \begin_layout Subsection
27259 \begin_inset Index idx
27262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 Roots can be created using the
27275 \begin_inset space ~
27283 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27289 arg "math-insert \\root"
27311 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27317 always produces a square root.
27320 \begin_layout Subsection
27321 Operators with Limits
27322 \begin_inset Index idx
27325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 \begin_inset Index idx
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27344 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27351 \begin_layout Standard
27353 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27357 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27360 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27361 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27362 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27363 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27364 The sum operator will automatically place its
27365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27372 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27374 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27378 \begin_inset Formula
27380 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27385 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27389 \begin_layout Standard
27390 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27392 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27393 behind the operator and using the menu
27395 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27396 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27398 \begin_inset space ~
27402 \begin_inset space ~
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27417 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27426 \begin_inset Index idx
27429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27436 \begin_inset Formula
27438 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27443 which will place the
27444 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27456 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27457 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27463 \begin_layout Standard
27464 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27471 Have a look at section
27472 \begin_inset space ~
27476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27478 reference "subsec:Functions"
27482 for an explanation of function macros.
27485 \begin_layout Subsection
27487 \begin_inset Index idx
27490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 Most math symbols can be found in the
27503 \begin_inset space ~
27508 under one of several categories; including
27525 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27529 \begin_layout Standard
27530 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27531 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27532 don't have to use the
27535 \begin_inset space ~
27540 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27542 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27545 \begin_layout Subsection
27547 \begin_inset Index idx
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27559 \begin_layout Standard
27560 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27566 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27572 \begin_inset space ~
27580 arg "math-insert \\space"
27584 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27585 For example, the sequence
27590 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27593 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27595 \begin_inset Graphics
27596 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27601 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27602 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27603 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27604 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27605 , because they are negative
27607 Here are two examples:
27610 \begin_layout Standard
27620 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27626 \begin_layout Standard
27636 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27642 \begin_layout Subsection
27644 \begin_inset Index idx
27647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27656 name "subsec:Functions"
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27667 \begin_inset space ~
27672 contains under the button
27675 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27678 a number of function macros, such as
27679 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27683 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27691 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27698 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27699 avoid confusions, because
27700 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27704 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27713 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27717 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27725 are placed, as described in section
27726 \begin_inset space ~
27730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27732 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27739 \begin_layout Subsection
27741 \begin_inset Index idx
27744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 \begin_layout Standard
27754 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27756 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27757 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27758 commands, for example, to enter
27759 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27762 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27763 Our example is entered by typing
27768 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27775 \begin_inset space ~
27779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27781 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27785 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27789 \begin_inset Float table
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27797 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27802 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27806 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27816 \begin_inset Tabular
27817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27818 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27905 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27959 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28013 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28067 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28175 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28229 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28283 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28337 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28382 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28403 \begin_layout Standard
28404 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28407 \begin_inset space ~
28415 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28418 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28422 \begin_layout Section
28423 Brackets and Delimiters
28424 \begin_inset Index idx
28427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28434 \begin_inset Index idx
28437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28446 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28454 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28456 For some purposes, using just the keys
28461 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28462 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28463 toolbar delimiter icon
28466 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28470 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28471 \begin_inset Formula
28473 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28481 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28482 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28486 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28489 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28495 \begin_inset Formula
28497 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28505 \begin_layout Standard
28506 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28507 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28511 \begin_layout Standard
28512 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28513 left side and right side.
28514 If you use the option
28517 \begin_inset space ~
28522 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28523 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28525 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28530 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28531 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28534 \begin_layout Standard
28535 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28536 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28537 is to go inside the brackets.
28538 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28543 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28544 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28545 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28549 arg "math-delim ( )"
28555 \begin_layout Section
28556 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28557 \begin_inset Index idx
28560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 \begin_inset Index idx
28570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28577 \begin_inset Index idx
28580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28581 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28589 \begin_layout Standard
28590 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28594 \begin_inset space ~
28602 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28606 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28607 Here is an example:
28608 \begin_inset Formula
28610 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28619 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28620 \begin_inset space ~
28624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28626 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28631 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28632 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28633 This alignment is set in the box
28638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28687 for every column as default.
28688 For example, the sequence
28689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28700 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28701 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28702 corresponds to the relevant column.
28703 The result will look like this:
28704 \begin_inset Formula
28707 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28708 column & has & has\,right\\
28709 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28718 \begin_layout Standard
28719 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28722 arg "newline-insert newline"
28725 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28726 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28728 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28731 or the math toolbar.
28734 \begin_layout Standard
28735 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28736 It can be created with the menu
28738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28739 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28741 \begin_inset space ~
28753 Here is an example:
28754 \begin_inset Formula
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28772 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28775 arg "newline-insert newline"
28779 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28784 arg "newline-insert newline"
28787 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28795 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28796 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28797 A new row is created by every further entry of
28800 arg "newline-insert newline"
28804 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28805 Here is an example:
28806 \begin_inset Formula
28808 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28809 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28814 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28815 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28816 \begin_inset Formula
28818 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28826 \begin_layout Standard
28827 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28834 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28835 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28838 reference "eq:asquared"
28843 The other types are described in section
28844 \begin_inset space ~
28848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28850 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28857 \begin_layout Section
28858 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28859 \begin_inset Index idx
28862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28863 Math ! Formula numbering
28869 \begin_inset Index idx
28872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28873 Math ! Referencing formulas
28879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28881 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28888 \begin_layout Standard
28889 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28892 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28894 \begin_inset space ~
28898 \begin_inset space ~
28906 arg "math-number-toggle"
28910 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28911 within parentheses.
28912 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28913 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28914 the document class.
28915 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28916 separated by a dot:
28917 \begin_inset Formula
28927 arg "math-number-toggle"
28930 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28931 You can only number displayed formulas.
28934 \begin_layout Standard
28935 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28938 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28940 \begin_inset space ~
28944 \begin_inset space ~
28952 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28955 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28956 \begin_inset Formula
28959 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28965 To number all lines use the shortcut
28968 arg "math-number-toggle"
28974 \begin_layout Standard
28975 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28978 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28979 A label is inserted with the menu
28981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28990 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28991 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28992 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29004 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
29005 label type when you have many labels in your document.
29006 We inserted in the following example the label
29007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29014 in the second line:
29015 \begin_inset Formula
29017 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29018 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29023 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29024 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29025 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29029 \begin_inset space ~
29037 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29041 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29042 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29043 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29044 as the formula number:
29047 \begin_layout Standard
29048 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29051 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29058 \begin_layout Standard
29059 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29060 's cross-reference box are described in section
29061 \begin_inset space ~
29065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29067 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29072 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29080 \begin_layout Section
29081 User defined math macros
29082 \begin_inset Index idx
29085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29094 \begin_layout Standard
29096 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29097 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29098 Math macros are explained in section
29101 \begin_inset space ~
29113 \begin_layout Section
29117 \begin_layout Subsection
29119 \begin_inset Index idx
29122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29131 \begin_layout Standard
29132 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29133 To set a font in a formula, use the
29136 \begin_inset space ~
29144 arg "math-insert \\font"
29147 , or enter its command, listed in table
29148 \begin_inset space ~
29152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29154 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29161 \begin_layout Standard
29162 \begin_inset Float table
29169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29170 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29175 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29179 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29189 \begin_inset Tabular
29190 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29191 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29225 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29252 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29279 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29312 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29339 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29361 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29367 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29368 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29381 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29453 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29459 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29467 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29480 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29496 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29530 \begin_layout Standard
29531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29539 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29542 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29544 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29548 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29568 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29569 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29574 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29575 space when you need a space in the box.
29576 Here is an example where
29577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 denotes the set of numbers:
29589 \begin_inset Formula
29591 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29601 You can, for example, put a character in
29610 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29614 \begin_inset Newline newline
29617 So it is better not to use this feature.
29620 \begin_layout Standard
29621 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29622 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29626 \begin_inset Newline newline
29629 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29635 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29636 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29642 \begin_layout Standard
29649 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29652 \begin_layout Standard
29653 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29655 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29656 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29658 \begin_inset space ~
29666 \begin_layout Subsection
29668 \begin_inset Index idx
29671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29681 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29683 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29687 \begin_inset space ~
29691 \begin_inset space ~
29699 \begin_inset space ~
29707 arg "math-insert \\font"
29711 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29712 in black instead of blue.
29713 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29714 Here is an example:
29715 \begin_inset Formula
29718 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29719 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29728 \begin_layout Subsection
29730 \begin_inset Index idx
29733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29742 \begin_layout Standard
29743 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29744 automatically chosen in most situations.
29762 For most characters,
29770 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29771 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29776 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29777 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29778 thinks are appropriate.
29779 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29782 arg "math-insert \\style"
29786 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29787 For example, you can set
29788 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29791 , which is normally in
29800 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29804 The four styles are used in the following example:
29807 \begin_layout Standard
29808 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29812 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29816 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29820 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29826 \begin_layout Standard
29827 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29828 is set in a particular size with the menu
29830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29832 \begin_inset space ~
29837 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29838 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29839 will be adjusted to correspond.
29840 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29851 \begin_layout Standard
29855 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29861 \begin_layout Section
29862 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29864 \begin_inset Index idx
29867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29874 \begin_inset Index idx
29877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29886 \begin_layout Standard
29888 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29889 that are in common use.
29892 \begin_layout Subsection
29893 Enabling AMS-Support
29896 \begin_layout Standard
29897 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29899 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29915 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29916 selecting the checkbox
29919 \begin_inset space ~
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29927 \begin_inset space ~
29936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29940 \begin_inset Index idx
29943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29944 Document ! Settings
29952 \begin_inset space ~
29958 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29959 -errors in formulas,
29960 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29963 \begin_layout Subsection
29965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29967 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29972 \begin_inset Index idx
29975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29985 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29986 provides a selection of different formula types.
29988 allows you to choose between
30009 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
30010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30017 , for an explanation of these formula types.
30020 \begin_layout Chapter
30024 \begin_layout Section
30026 \begin_inset Index idx
30029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30038 name "sec:Cross-References"
30045 \begin_layout Standard
30046 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30047 's strengths is cross-references.
30048 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30050 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30051 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30052 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30055 \begin_layout Enumerate
30059 \begin_layout Enumerate
30060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30062 name "enu:Second-item"
30069 \begin_layout Enumerate
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30074 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30079 or by pressing the toolbar button
30086 A gray label box like this:
30087 \begin_inset Graphics
30088 filename clipart/label.png
30092 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30094 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30129 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30130 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30146 \begin_layout Standard
30147 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30152 or the toolbar button
30155 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30159 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30160 \begin_inset Graphics
30161 filename clipart/reference.png
30165 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30167 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30180 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30184 \begin_layout Standard
30185 As an alternative to
30187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30190 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30195 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30196 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30210 \begin_layout Standard
30211 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30218 reference "enu:Second-item"
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30226 It is recommended to use a protected space
30230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30231 described in section
30232 \begin_inset space ~
30236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30238 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30247 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30248 line breaks between them.
30251 \begin_layout Standard
30252 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30255 \begin_layout Description
30256 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30259 reference "fig:Two-images"
30266 \begin_layout Description
30267 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30268 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30280 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30287 \begin_layout Description
30288 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30289 \begin_inset space ~
30293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30294 LatexCommand pageref
30295 reference "fig:Two-images"
30302 \begin_layout Description
30304 \begin_inset space ~
30308 \begin_inset space ~
30311 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30313 LatexCommand vpageref
30314 reference "fig:Two-images"
30319 \begin_inset Newline newline
30322 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30323 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30324 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30325 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30326 it prints “on the next page”.
30327 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30330 \begin_layout Description
30332 \begin_inset space ~
30336 \begin_inset space ~
30340 \begin_inset space ~
30343 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30346 reference "fig:Two-images"
30351 \begin_inset Newline newline
30354 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30360 ; otherwise it behaves like
30364 \begin_inset space ~
30368 \begin_inset space ~
30377 \begin_layout Description
30379 \begin_inset space ~
30382 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30383 \begin_inset Newline newline
30387 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30395 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30405 \begin_inset Index idx
30408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30410 packages ! prettyref
30416 \begin_inset Index idx
30419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30421 packages ! refstyle
30432 \begin_inset Newline newline
30435 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30436 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30439 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30452 is the default and preferred because
30456 supports only English documents.
30457 The format is specified by using the command
30461 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30470 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30471 preamble of the document.
30472 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30490 \begin_inset Newline newline
30497 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30502 \begin_inset Newline newline
30513 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30514 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30516 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30517 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30522 , you might do so as follows:
30523 \begin_inset Newline newline
30530 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30531 format{prop}{Proposition
30536 \begin_inset Newline newline
30539 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30540 the package documentation
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30543 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30549 \begin_inset Newline newline
30560 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30567 \begin_layout Description
30569 \begin_inset space ~
30572 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30574 LatexCommand nameref
30575 reference "fig:Two-images"
30582 \begin_layout Description
30584 \begin_inset space ~
30587 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30588 label for the reference:
30589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30590 LatexCommand labelonly
30591 reference "fig:Two-images"
30596 \begin_inset Newline newline
30599 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30600 Code, if you want to issue a command
30601 that \SpecialChar LyX
30607 , then you may want to use the
30610 \begin_inset space ~
30615 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30625 This is the form needed for e.
30626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30630 \begin_inset space \space{}
30637 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30638 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30640 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30644 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30649 You can only use the style
30653 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30657 is always possible.
30660 \begin_layout Standard
30661 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30662 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30664 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30665 \begin_inset space ~
30669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30671 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30678 \begin_layout Standard
30679 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30683 \begin_inset space ~
30687 \begin_inset space ~
30692 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30693 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30694 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30697 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30700 \begin_inset space ~
30705 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30706 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30709 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30713 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30714 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30715 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30721 \begin_layout Standard
30722 You can change labels at any time.
30723 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30725 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30727 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30728 change them all manually
30733 \begin_layout Standard
30734 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30736 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 References are described in detail in the section
30752 \begin_layout Section
30753 Table of Contents and other Listings
30754 \begin_inset Index idx
30757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30764 \begin_inset Index idx
30767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 Navigating ! Outline
30774 \begin_inset Index idx
30777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30793 \begin_layout Subsection
30795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30797 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30805 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30808 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30810 \begin_inset space ~
30814 \begin_inset space ~
30820 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30822 If you click on it, the
30826 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30827 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30828 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30830 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30837 that is described in section
30838 \begin_inset space ~
30842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30844 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30853 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30855 \begin_inset space ~
30859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30861 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30865 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30867 \begin_inset space ~
30871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30873 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30877 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30879 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30882 \begin_layout Subsection
30883 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30886 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30893 \begin_layout Standard
30894 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30896 You can insert them via the
30898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30899 List/Contents/References
30902 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30905 \begin_layout Section
30906 URLs and Hyperlinks
30907 \begin_inset Index idx
30910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30917 \begin_inset Index idx
30920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 \begin_layout Subsection
30931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30940 \begin_layout Standard
30941 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30952 \begin_inset Flex URL
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30957 https://www.lyx.org
30965 \begin_layout Standard
30966 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30972 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30976 \begin_layout Standard
30977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30994 \begin_layout Subsection
30996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30998 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
31005 \begin_layout Standard
31006 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
31008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31011 or with the toolbar button
31018 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31027 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31028 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31031 name "LyX's homepage"
31032 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31037 , an Email address like this:
31038 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31040 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31041 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31047 , or a link to a file.
31052 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31060 \begin_layout Standard
31061 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31074 to the link target.
31077 \begin_layout Standard
31078 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31079 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31080 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31081 the text style dialog.
31082 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31088 name "LyX's homepage"
31089 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31097 \begin_layout Standard
31098 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31102 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31109 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31111 \begin_inset Newline newline
31119 \begin_inset Newline newline
31126 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31127 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31131 \begin_layout Section
31133 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31135 \begin_inset Index idx
31138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31147 name "sec:Counters"
31154 \begin_layout Standard
31156 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31157 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31158 is its ability to manage counters.
31159 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31160 modify counters directly.
31161 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
31163 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31170 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31171 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31172 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31173 to set the section counter to four.
31180 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31181 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31182 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
31183 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31188 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31189 There are five commands you can use:
31192 \begin_layout Enumerate
31194 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31195 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31198 \begin_layout Enumerate
31200 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31201 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
31202 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
31205 \begin_layout Enumerate
31207 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31208 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31211 \begin_layout Enumerate
31213 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31214 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
31218 \begin_layout Enumerate
31220 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31221 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
31224 \begin_layout Standard
31226 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31227 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31228 those that are available in the current document class.
31233 \begin_layout Section
31235 \begin_inset Index idx
31238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31247 name "sec:Appendices"
31254 \begin_layout Standard
31255 Appendices are created with the menu
31257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31263 \begin_inset space ~
31269 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31270 as the appendix part of the book.
31271 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31274 \begin_layout Standard
31275 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31276 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31277 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31278 and the subsection number.
31279 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31285 \begin_inset space ~
31289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31291 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31299 \begin_inset space ~
31303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31305 reference "subsec:Export"
31312 \begin_layout Section
31314 \begin_inset Index idx
31317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31326 name "sec:Bibliography"
31333 \begin_layout Standard
31334 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31336 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31337 \begin_inset space ~
31341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31343 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31350 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31355 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31356 \begin_inset space ~
31360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31362 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31367 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31368 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31369 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31373 using a bibliography database.
31376 \begin_layout Standard
31377 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31378 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31382 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31383 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31384 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31385 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31386 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31389 \begin_layout Subsection
31390 The Bibliography Environment
31391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31393 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31405 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31407 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31416 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31418 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31419 of ASCII characters only.
31423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31428 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31434 \begin_inset Newline newline
31438 \begin_inset Flex URL
31441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31443 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31453 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31463 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31464 \begin_inset Newline newline
31471 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31472 the number of the entry.
31477 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31486 \begin_layout Standard
31487 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31492 or the toolbar button
31495 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31499 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31500 containing the available citations.
31501 Select one or more keys from the list and
31511 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31512 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31516 \begin_layout Standard
31517 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31518 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31519 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31535 Companion Second Edition
31538 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31540 key "latexcompanion"
31548 \begin_layout Standard
31549 The \SpecialChar LyX
31550 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31561 \begin_layout Standard
31562 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31569 \begin_inset Index idx
31572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31581 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31582 the label needs to be given the form
31583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31594 Author A and Author B(Year)
31595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31602 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31609 \begin_inset space ~
31614 in the document settings
31615 \begin_inset Index idx
31618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31619 Document ! Settings
31626 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31628 \begin_inset space ~
31634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31636 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31644 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31646 Once you have done that, the
31650 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31667 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31668 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31669 These two are madatory.
31670 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31673 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31675 ) and in abrreviated form (
31682 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31683 add the abbreviated form to
31687 and the full list to the optional
31695 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31696 If specified like this,
31698 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31699 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31709 is specified, toggling
31710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31717 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31718 full and abbreviated list
31722 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31723 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31724 the citation references.
31725 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31730 \begin_layout Standard
31731 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31736 \begin_inset space ~
31744 arg "layout-paragraph"
31748 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31751 \begin_layout Subsection
31752 Bibliography databases
31753 \begin_inset Index idx
31756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31757 Bibliography ! Databases
31763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31765 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31779 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31781 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31782 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31787 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31789 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31790 your working field in a database.
31791 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31792 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31793 list for that document.
31794 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31799 The database is a text file with the file extension
31800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31811 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31812 The format is explained in
31813 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31820 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31824 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31830 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31831 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31832 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31834 \begin_inset Flex URL
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31839 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31849 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31850 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31851 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31853 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31855 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31856 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31857 Those are addressed by
31862 \begin_inset Index idx
31865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31867 packages ! biblatex
31873 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31874 (although it has been significantly
31875 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31885 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31886 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31887 might conversely fail to correctly
31888 handle databases that use specific
31897 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31901 \begin_layout Standard
31902 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31907 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31913 \begin_inset Index idx
31916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31917 Document ! Settings
31929 \begin_inset space ~
31934 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31943 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31945 \begin_inset Index idx
31948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31958 \begin_layout Standard
31959 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31963 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31965 \begin_inset space ~
31971 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31972 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31980 Add bibliography to TOC
31982 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31987 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31988 in the document or just the cited references.
31990 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31995 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31996 differ from the encoding of the document.
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32002 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32003 style file is a text file with the file extension
32004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32015 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
32016 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32017 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
32018 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
32020 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
32025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32026 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32027 \begin_inset Newline newline
32031 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32033 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32043 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32048 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32053 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32058 \begin_inset Index idx
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32062 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32068 \begin_inset Index idx
32071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32073 packages ! biblatex
32081 \begin_layout Standard
32082 Accessing a database via
32086 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32090 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32092 \begin_inset space ~
32098 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32099 you cannot select a
32104 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32108 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32111 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32112 As for the styles, note the following.
32117 \begin_layout Standard
32122 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32135 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32136 file (text file with the file extension
32137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32148 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32149 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32151 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32160 styles are not set in the
32163 \begin_inset space ~
32168 dialog, but in the document settings.
32169 \begin_inset Index idx
32172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 Document ! Settings
32178 However, in the dialog in the
32182 field, which is only visible if you use
32186 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32187 example how its heading will appear).
32188 These options are described in detail in the
32193 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32203 \begin_layout Standard
32204 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32205 \begin_inset space ~
32209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32211 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32222 Bibliography Processors
32225 \begin_layout Standard
32226 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32227 uses a bibliography processor,
32228 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32229 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32230 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32232 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32233 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32237 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32239 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32240 You can do this on a general level in
32242 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32243 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32244 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32247 or for individual documents in
32249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32250 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32254 The following variants are available by default:
32257 \begin_layout Description
32258 biber a specific, modern processor
32259 \begin_inset Index idx
32262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32269 developed exclusively for
32273 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32279 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32284 makes use of; if you use the
32288 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32295 \begin_layout Description
32296 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32297 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32298 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32302 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32305 \begin_layout Description
32306 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32307 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32311 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32315 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32319 features are supported.
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32323 By default (with the
32329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32343 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32344 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32345 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32348 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32349 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32362 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32363 -based bibliography styles).
32364 This should suit most needs.
32367 \begin_layout Standard
32368 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32369 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32370 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32375 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32376 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32377 You can adjust it in
32379 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32380 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32381 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32388 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32389 can add below the selection.
32390 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32391 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32397 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32411 \begin_layout Standard
32413 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32415 These are explained in detail in section
32417 Customizing Bibliographies
32421 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32426 Additional Features
32429 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
32433 \begin_layout Subsection
32435 \begin_inset Index idx
32438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32439 Bibliography ! Citation format
32445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32447 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32454 \begin_layout Standard
32455 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32460 \begin_inset space \space{}
32463 numerical citation (as
32464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32471 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32479 ) or author-year citations (as
32480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32489 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32493 \begin_layout Standard
32494 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32498 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32502 \begin_inset Index idx
32505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32506 Document ! Settings
32511 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32517 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32518 labels, is there to use
32521 \begin_inset space ~
32532 \begin_inset space ~
32537 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32540 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32547 \begin_layout Standard
32548 With a bibliography database (see
32549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32551 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32558 ) one has in contrary to the
32562 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32563 These style formats are available:
32566 \begin_layout Description
32568 \begin_inset space ~
32571 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32572 -based approached without any additional packages
32573 (simple numeric citations).
32576 \begin_layout Description
32577 Biblatex loads the package
32582 \begin_inset Index idx
32585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32587 packages ! biblatex
32592 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32594 Biblatex citation style
32598 Biblatex bibliography style
32601 Options to the package
32605 can be entered in the
32612 \begin_layout Description
32614 \begin_inset space ~
32618 \begin_inset space ~
32621 mode) loads the package
32625 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32626 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32638 behavior very closely.
32643 this option has some additional styles.
32648 styles are also supported by this variant.
32651 \begin_layout Description
32653 \begin_inset space ~
32656 (BibTeX) loads the package
32661 \begin_inset Index idx
32664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32671 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32674 \begin_layout Description
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32679 (BibTeX) loads the package
32684 \begin_inset Index idx
32687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32694 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32697 \begin_layout Standard
32706 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32708 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32717 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32719 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32720 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32722 Biblatex citation style
32725 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32731 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32735 \begin_layout Standard
32736 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32737 are available in the
32742 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32743 a name prefix such as
32744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32759 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32764 \begin_inset space \space{}
32768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32779 \begin_layout Standard
32780 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32786 \begin_inset space \space{}
32789 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32795 \begin_inset space \space{}
32799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32811 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32815 \begin_inset space ~
32823 \begin_inset space ~
32829 Here is a simple example where the text
32830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32834 \begin_inset space ~
32838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32841 appears after the reference:
32844 \begin_layout Quote
32846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32849 key "latexcompanion"
32857 \begin_layout Standard
32858 All styles except for
32862 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32872 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32876 \begin_layout Standard
32877 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32878 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32879 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32884 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32885 multi-citation (so-called
32886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32889 qualified citation lists
32890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32896 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32901 dialog will display three columns in the field
32908 \begin_inset space ~
32916 \begin_inset space ~
32924 \begin_inset space ~
32930 If you double-click on an item's
32933 \begin_inset space ~
32941 \begin_inset space ~
32946 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32949 General text before
32955 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32958 \begin_layout Subsection
32960 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32963 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32967 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32971 \begin_layout Standard
32973 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32975 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32993 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32996 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32999 \begin_layout Itemize
33001 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
33002 If citation entries include any of the fields
33003 \begin_inset Flex Code
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33017 \begin_inset Flex Code
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33022 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33030 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33031 \begin_inset Flex Code
33034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33036 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33044 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33045 \begin_inset Flex Code
33048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33058 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33061 \begin_layout Itemize
33063 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33064 If citation entries include any of the fields
33065 \begin_inset Flex Code
33068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33070 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33078 (filled by JabRef) or
33079 \begin_inset Flex Code
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33084 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33092 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33093 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33094 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33097 \begin_layout Standard
33099 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33100 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33101 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33104 Search drive for cited files
33108 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33109 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33110 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33111 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33115 It uses the tokens supplied at
33119 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33120 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
33121 arbitrary position).
33123 opens the first matching file it finds.
33124 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33125 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33126 the chance this works for you.
33131 \begin_layout Standard
33133 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33134 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33135 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33137 \begin_inset Flex Code
33140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33151 \begin_inset Flex Code
33154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33156 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33164 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
33168 Cite format description
33175 \begin_layout Section
33177 \begin_inset Index idx
33180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33196 \begin_layout Standard
33197 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33206 or the toolbar button
33213 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33214 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33215 by \SpecialChar LyX
33216 as the index entry.
33219 \begin_layout Standard
33220 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33223 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33225 \begin_inset space ~
33231 A light blue box labeled
33232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33243 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33244 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33248 \begin_layout Standard
33249 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33250 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33251 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33252 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33256 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33264 \begin_layout Subsection
33265 Grouping Index Entries
33266 \begin_inset Index idx
33269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33279 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33281 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33282 lists under the entry
33283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33291 First we create the entry
33292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33306 reference "subsec:Lists"
33311 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33312 \begin_inset space ~
33316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33318 reference "sec:Itemize"
33322 , we insert the command
33325 \begin_layout Standard
33331 \begin_layout Standard
33335 \begin_layout Standard
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 for the enumerated list in section
33343 \begin_inset space ~
33347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33349 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 The exclamation mark
33358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33365 marks the grouping levels.
33366 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33367 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33368 If we don't have an index entry for
33369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33376 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33379 \begin_layout Subsection
33381 \begin_inset Index idx
33384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33385 Index ! Page ranges
33393 \begin_layout Standard
33394 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33396 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33397 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33398 an index entry in section
33399 \begin_inset space ~
33403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33405 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33412 \begin_layout Standard
33415 Paragraph environments|(
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33419 and another entry at the end of section
33420 \begin_inset space ~
33424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33426 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33433 \begin_layout Standard
33436 Paragraph environments|)
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33464 respectively start and end the index range.
33465 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33466 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33467 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33468 An example is the index entry
33469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33472 Document ! Settings
33473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33479 \begin_layout Subsection
33481 \begin_inset Index idx
33484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 Index ! Cross referencing
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33494 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33495 We referred for example in the index entry
33496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33504 \begin_inset space ~
33508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33510 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33514 ) to the index entry
33515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33522 in the same section using the entry
33525 \begin_layout Standard
33528 GIF|see{Image formats}
33531 \begin_layout Standard
33532 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33534 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33535 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33538 \begin_layout Subsection
33540 \begin_inset Index idx
33543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33544 Index ! Entry order
33552 \begin_layout Standard
33553 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33554 follow the rules for the index order.
33555 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33561 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33563 \begin_inset space ~
33567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33569 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33578 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33579 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33604 \begin_inset Index idx
33607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33608 Dummy entries ! maïs
33614 \begin_inset Index idx
33617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 Dummy entries ! maître
33624 \begin_inset Index idx
33627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33628 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33633 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33634 maïs, maison, maître.
33635 To achieve this, we use the command
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33641 previous entry@current entry
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33645 In our case we want to have
33646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33661 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33664 \begin_layout Standard
33670 \begin_layout Standard
33671 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33672 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33674 See the next subsection for an example.
33677 \begin_layout Subsection
33679 \begin_inset Index idx
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33683 Index ! Entry layout
33691 \begin_layout Standard
33692 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33693 \begin_inset Index idx
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33699 This is an italic dummy entry
33704 You can also format the page number using the character
33705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33712 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33713 -command without a backslash.
33714 We can write for example
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33720 italic page number:|textit
33723 \begin_layout Standard
33724 to get the page number in italic.
33725 \begin_inset Index idx
33728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33729 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33734 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33735 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33753 \begin_inset space ~
33759 Have a look at section
33760 \begin_inset space ~
33764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33766 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33770 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33774 \begin_layout Standard
33775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33783 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33787 to generate the index, see section
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33794 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33803 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33808 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33809 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33812 key "latexcompanion"
33825 \begin_layout Standard
33826 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33828 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33829 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33830 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33831 If so, put the following in the preamble
33834 \begin_layout Standard
33846 \begin_layout Standard
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33856 \begin_layout Standard
33857 in the index entry.
33858 \begin_inset Index idx
33861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33862 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33867 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33868 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33869 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33874 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33875 a bold font for all index entries.
33876 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33888 documentation for details,
33889 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33891 key "makeindex,xindy"
33899 \begin_layout Subsection
33901 \begin_inset Index idx
33904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33913 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33920 \begin_layout Standard
33921 If the index generation program
33925 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33926 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33930 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33931 distribution, is used.
33935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33940 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33941 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33942 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33943 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33944 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33954 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33956 dialog, see section
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33963 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33968 The available options are listed and explained in
33969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33971 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33977 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33981 \begin_layout Standard
33982 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33983 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33991 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33992 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33995 \begin_layout Subsection
33999 \begin_layout Standard
34000 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
34001 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
34002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34009 next to the standard index.
34011 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
34012 that add this feature.
34019 \begin_inset Index idx
34022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34024 packages ! splitidx
34029 package to generate multiple indexes.
34030 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34038 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34046 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34047 style, but it also includes
34048 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34049 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34057 \begin_layout Standard
34058 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34059 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34062 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34065 and select the option
34067 Use multiple Indexes
34074 already contains the standard index
34075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34083 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34084 also appear as a heading) to the
34088 input field and press the
34093 The new index now also appears in the list.
34094 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34095 label color to the new index.
34098 \begin_layout Standard
34099 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34103 List/Contents/References
34109 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34110 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34111 are additional features:
34114 \begin_layout Itemize
34115 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34116 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34119 \begin_layout Itemize
34120 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34121 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34126 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34127 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34128 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34129 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34132 \begin_layout Itemize
34137 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34138 code in the name of the index.
34141 \begin_layout Section
34142 Nomenclature/Glossary
34143 \begin_inset Index idx
34146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34153 \begin_inset Index idx
34156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34187 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34196 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34197 called nomenclature or glossary.
34200 \begin_layout Standard
34201 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34208 \begin_inset Index idx
34211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34219 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34221 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34228 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34233 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34234 and then use the menu
34236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34247 or the toolbar button
34250 arg "nomencl-insert"
34255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34266 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34269 \begin_layout Standard
34270 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34271 The first is the term or
34275 that you wish to define.
34280 of the term or symbol.
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34292 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34293 code for nomenclature entries the option
34297 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34305 \begin_layout Subsection
34306 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34307 \begin_inset Index idx
34310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34311 Nomenclature ! Layout
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34324 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34331 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34339 \begin_inset Newline newline
34347 \begin_inset Newline newline
34353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34360 character starts/ends the formula.
34361 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34362 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34374 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34386 syntax is given in section
34387 \begin_inset space ~
34391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34393 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34400 \begin_layout Standard
34404 \begin_inset space ~
34409 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34411 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34416 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34423 in this document is:
34424 \begin_inset Newline newline
34429 dummy entry for the character
34434 \begin_inset Newline newline
34446 \begin_inset space ~
34456 font use the command
34485 \begin_layout Standard
34486 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34491 \begin_inset space \space{}
34495 \begin_inset Newline newline
34511 \begin_inset Newline newline
34514 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34515 This command will make the font of all symbols
34522 \begin_inset space ~
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 If the characters |
34532 \begin_inset space \space{}
34536 \begin_inset space \space{}
34540 \begin_inset space \space{}
34544 \begin_inset space \space{}
34548 \begin_inset space \space{}
34551 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34552 code they need to be escaped
34554 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34556 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34559 character in front of them.
34560 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34562 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34563 LatexCommand nomenclature
34564 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34565 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34571 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34573 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34574 LatexCommand nomenclature
34575 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34576 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34586 \begin_layout Subsection
34587 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34588 \begin_inset Index idx
34591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34592 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34602 -code of the symbol
34604 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34606 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34609 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34610 LatexCommand nomenclature
34612 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34620 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34624 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34625 LatexCommand nomenclature
34628 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34634 They will be sorted by
34635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34661 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34664 will be sorted before the
34668 since the character
34669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34676 is considered in sorting.
34679 \begin_layout Standard
34680 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34683 \begin_inset space ~
34688 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34689 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34691 For the example given, you can insert
34695 in this field for the
34696 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34703 will be located before
34704 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34710 \begin_layout Standard
34711 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34726 \begin_layout Subsection
34727 Nomenclature Options
34728 \begin_inset Index idx
34731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34732 Nomenclature ! Options
34738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34740 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34747 \begin_layout Standard
34752 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34753 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34756 \begin_layout Description
34757 refeq Appends the phrase
34758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34773 to every nomenclature entry, where
34779 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34782 \begin_layout Description
34783 refpage Appends the phrase
34784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34799 to every nomenclature entry, where
34805 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34808 \begin_layout Description
34809 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34812 \begin_layout Standard
34813 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34814 class options list in the
34816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34820 In this document the options
34827 \begin_layout Standard
34828 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34836 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34841 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34844 \begin_layout Description
34854 \begin_layout Description
34857 nomrefpage Like the
34864 \begin_layout Description
34867 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34876 \begin_layout Description
34880 \begin_inset space ~
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34891 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34894 \begin_layout Standard
34896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34903 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34904 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34908 \begin_layout Standard
34917 \begin_inset Newline newline
34923 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 \begin_inset space ~
34939 unskip, see equation
34942 \begin_inset Newline newline
34949 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34950 \begin_inset Newline newline
34956 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34977 \begin_layout Standard
34978 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34981 \begin_inset space ~
34986 in the document settings under
34989 \begin_inset space ~
34997 \begin_layout Standard
35005 \begin_inset Newline newline
35009 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35013 \begin_inset space ~
35025 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35027 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35028 \begin_inset Newline newline
35035 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35036 \begin_inset Newline newline
35040 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35056 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35061 \begin_layout Subsection
35062 Printing the Nomenclature
35063 \begin_inset Index idx
35066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35067 Nomenclature ! Printing
35075 \begin_layout Standard
35076 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35079 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35095 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35096 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35097 You can choose between these settings:
35100 \begin_layout Description
35101 Default a space of 1
35102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35108 \begin_layout Description
35110 \begin_inset space ~
35114 \begin_inset space ~
35117 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35120 \begin_layout Description
35121 Custom custom space
35124 \begin_layout Standard
35125 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35134 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35142 For example, in order to change the name to
35146 , add the following line to the preamble:
35149 \begin_layout Standard
35162 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35167 \begin_inset Newline newline
35182 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35185 \begin_layout Subsection
35186 Nomenclature Program
35187 \begin_inset Index idx
35190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35191 Nomenclature ! Program
35197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35199 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35206 \begin_layout Standard
35212 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35213 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35215 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35220 by adding options, see section
35221 \begin_inset space ~
35225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35227 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35232 The available options are listed and explained in
35233 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35235 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35243 \begin_layout Section
35245 \begin_inset Index idx
35248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 \begin_inset Index idx
35258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35259 Document ! Branches
35265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35267 name "sec:Branches"
35274 \begin_layout Standard
35275 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35276 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35277 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35278 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35281 \begin_layout Standard
35282 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35283 allows you to put text into branches.
35284 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35285 To create a branch, either select the menu
35287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35288 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35291 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35300 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35301 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35302 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35303 and whether the name of the branch should
35304 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35305 (see below for an example).
35306 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35307 to the name of the other) and to add
35308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35320 \begin_inset space ~
35323 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35324 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35329 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35334 where you can choose a branch.
35335 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35339 \begin_layout Standard
35340 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35341 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35344 \begin_layout Standard
35345 \begin_inset Branch Question
35349 \begin_layout Standard
35354 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35362 \begin_layout Standard
35363 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35367 \begin_layout Standard
35372 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35388 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35391 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35392 Consider for example a file
35393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35400 which has the above branches.
35402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35409 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35433 branch were inactive,
35434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35449 branch was active, likewise
35450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35465 branch was active, and
35466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35469 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35473 if both branches were active.
35474 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35475 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
35488 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35489 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35493 \begin_inset space ~
35501 \begin_layout Standard
35502 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35506 \begin_layout Standard
35512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35519 branch is deactivated.
35525 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35531 \begin_layout Standard
35532 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35533 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35534 definitions for each branch.
35535 For example you can define for the question branch
35539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35540 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35541 -syntax, see section
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35548 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35570 \begin_layout Standard
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 and for the answer branch
35584 \begin_layout Standard
35594 \begin_layout Standard
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 \begin_inset Branch Question
35609 \begin_layout Standard
35613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35642 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35646 \begin_layout Standard
35650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 \begin_layout Standard
35679 Now it is possible to use the
35683 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35690 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35693 commands to obtain conditional output.
35694 Here is an example formula where only the
35701 \begin_inset Formula
35703 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35711 \begin_layout Standard
35712 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35720 \begin_layout Standard
35721 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35727 \begin_inset space \space{}
35730 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35732 For this advanced usage, see the
35738 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35743 \begin_layout Section
35745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35747 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35752 \begin_inset Index idx
35755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35764 \begin_layout Standard
35767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35768 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35771 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35773 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35779 \begin_inset Index idx
35782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35784 packages ! hyperref
35789 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35790 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35791 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35792 part of the document.
35795 \begin_layout Standard
35796 The header information in the dialog tab
35800 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35801 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35802 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35803 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35807 \begin_inset space ~
35811 \begin_inset space ~
35816 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35817 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35818 and author entries.
35822 \begin_inset space ~
35826 \begin_inset space ~
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35835 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35838 \begin_layout Standard
35839 You can specify in the dialog tab
35843 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35848 \begin_inset space ~
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35856 \begin_inset space ~
35861 option allows long links to be split;
35864 \begin_inset space ~
35868 \begin_inset space ~
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35885 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35893 colors the different links.
35894 The default colors are:
35897 \begin_layout Labeling
35898 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35903 for hyperlinks and URLs
35906 \begin_layout Labeling
35907 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35915 \begin_layout Labeling
35916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35924 \begin_layout Standard
35925 but you can change these in the field
35930 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35933 \begin_layout Standard
35936 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35944 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35945 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35946 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35949 \begin_layout Standard
35954 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35955 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35956 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35966 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35967 when opening the PDF.
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35972 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35976 1 will only display the sections.
35979 \begin_layout Standard
35980 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35981 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35987 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35988 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35998 \begin_layout Section
36000 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36004 name "sec:TeX-Code"
36011 \begin_layout Subsection
36014 \begin_inset Index idx
36017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36027 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36034 \begin_layout Standard
36035 As \SpecialChar LyX
36036 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36037 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36038 commands and constructs,
36041 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36042 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36043 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36044 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36045 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36046 cannot support all packages and
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36051 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36052 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36053 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36057 Code box is created by the menu
36059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36066 or by the toolbar button
36079 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36087 \begin_layout Standard
36088 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36090 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36092 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36097 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36102 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36109 , you can write the command part
36115 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36116 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36120 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36121 Code box behind the word.
36122 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36123 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36128 \begin_inset Graphics
36129 filename clipart/ERT.png
36137 \begin_layout Standard
36141 \begin_layout Standard
36142 This is a line with a
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36169 \begin_layout Standard
36170 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36178 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36179 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36180 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36181 know that the command is finished.
36189 \begin_layout Subsection
36190 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36192 \begin_inset Argument 1
36195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36196 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36203 \begin_inset Index idx
36206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36216 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36223 \begin_layout Standard
36224 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
36225 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36226 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
36227 uses in the background.
36228 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
36229 is based on commands, you can
36230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36238 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
36239 any time if you know the right commands.
36240 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
36241 is the end of the day.
36242 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
36243 all caption labels bold.
36244 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
36246 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
36250 \begin_layout Standard
36251 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36253 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36255 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36268 \begin_layout Standard
36269 As result you find that the package
36274 \begin_inset Index idx
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36285 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36290 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36302 \begin_layout Standard
36307 usepackage[options]{package name}
36310 \begin_layout Standard
36311 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36312 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36313 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36314 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 In your case the package name is
36323 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36328 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36329 So you add the command
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36337 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36340 \begin_layout Standard
36341 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36346 For more commands provided by the
36350 package, have a look at its documentation,
36351 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36366 \begin_layout Standard
36367 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36369 For example if you use a
36373 class, you don't need the package
36377 , you can instead write
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36385 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36390 \begin_layout Standard
36391 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36392 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36393 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36400 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36403 \begin_layout Standard
36404 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36405 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36407 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36408 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36409 Code box as described in the previous
36413 \begin_layout Standard
36414 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36415 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36420 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36428 \begin_layout Standard
36429 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36435 \begin_layout Standard
36439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36449 \begin_inset Note Note
36452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36453 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36461 \begin_layout Left Header
36462 \begin_inset Argument 1
36465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36485 \begin_inset Note Note
36488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36489 defines the header line as described below
36497 \begin_layout Center Header
36498 \begin_inset Argument 1
36501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36510 \begin_layout Right Header
36511 \begin_inset Argument 1
36514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36535 \begin_layout Left Footer
36536 \begin_inset Argument 1
36539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36560 \begin_layout Center Footer
36561 \begin_inset Argument 1
36564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36576 \begin_inset Newline newline
36580 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36586 \begin_layout Right Footer
36587 \begin_inset Argument 1
36590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36612 \begin_layout Section
36613 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36616 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36621 \begin_inset Index idx
36624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36625 Document ! Header/Footer line
36631 \begin_inset Index idx
36634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36643 \begin_layout Standard
36644 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36671 As a second step add in the menu
36673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36674 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36683 Custom Header/Footerlines
36686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36690 This module offers the following 6
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36697 \begin_layout Description
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36711 \begin_inset space ~
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_layout Description
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset space ~
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36745 \begin_layout Standard
36746 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36747 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36750 \begin_layout Standard
36751 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36752 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36760 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36764 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36768 \begin_inset Float figure
36775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36778 \begin_inset Tabular
36779 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36780 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36781 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36783 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36803 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36832 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36843 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36847 The normal text on the page goes here.
36848 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36850 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36851 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36856 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36865 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36894 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36923 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36941 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36946 name "fig:Page-layout"
36950 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36964 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36972 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36976 \begin_inset space ~
36981 is set to “Default”.
36982 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36991 \begin_layout Subsection
36995 \begin_layout Standard
36996 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36997 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36998 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36999 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
37001 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
37003 Defining the footer line works similarly.
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37007 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37008 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37022 \begin_layout Description
37025 thepage prints the current page number
37028 \begin_layout Description
37031 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37034 \begin_layout Description
37037 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37040 \begin_layout Description
37043 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37044 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37051 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37054 because it usually goes in a left header.
37057 \begin_layout Description
37060 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37061 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37063 It is normally used in the right header.
37066 \begin_layout Subsection
37067 Default header/footer
37070 \begin_layout Standard
37071 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37072 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37073 footer has the page number.
37074 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37075 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37076 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37079 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_layout Subsection
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37092 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37093 Some pages are different.
37094 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37095 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37096 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37097 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37098 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37102 Header and footer decoration line
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37106 By default, you get a 0.4
37107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37110 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37111 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37123 in the following way:
37126 \begin_layout Standard
37133 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37150 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37160 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37176 Several header/footer lines
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37180 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37181 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37182 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37184 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37217 headheight}{height}
37220 \begin_layout Standard
37225 is a size in standard units (e.
37226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37230 \begin_inset space \space{}
37238 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
37239 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37240 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37241 logfile with the menu
37243 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37258 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37263 \begin_inset Index idx
37266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37268 packages ! fancyhdr
37274 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
37275 for your header/footer.
37278 \begin_layout Subsection
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37284 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37285 This example consists of the following definition:
37288 \begin_layout Description
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37299 , empty optional argument
37302 \begin_layout Description
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37307 Header empty, empty optional argument
37310 \begin_layout Description
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37321 in the optional argument
37324 \begin_layout Description
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37335 in the optional argument
37338 \begin_layout Description
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37357 \begin_inset Newline newline
37361 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37368 in the optional argument
37371 \begin_layout Description
37373 \begin_inset space ~
37382 , empty optional argument
37385 \begin_layout Description
37388 headrulewidth set to 2
37389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37395 \begin_layout Standard
37396 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37397 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37413 \begin_layout Standard
37414 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37420 \begin_layout Standard
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37428 pagestyle{headings}
37434 \begin_inset Note Note
37437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37438 switches back to page style with the default headings
37446 \begin_layout Section
37447 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37450 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37455 \begin_inset Index idx
37458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 \begin_inset Index idx
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37479 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37480 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37481 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37484 \begin_layout Subsection
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37495 \begin_inset Index idx
37498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37500 packages ! preview-latex
37505 (on some systems named simply
37510 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37519 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37521 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37529 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37530 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37531 -package are automatically
37532 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37536 \begin_layout Subsection
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37542 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37544 activate the option
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37554 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37567 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37592 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37595 \begin_layout Standard
37596 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37617 \begin_layout Standard
37618 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37619 and when you finish
37623 \begin_layout Standard
37624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37632 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37633 generated by activating the option
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37642 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37650 \begin_layout Subsection
37651 Selected document parts
37654 \begin_layout Standard
37655 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37656 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37657 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37658 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37660 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37666 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37667 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37668 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37671 \begin_layout Standard
37672 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37679 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37691 is explained in section
37693 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37708 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37709 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37710 the final rotated boxes,
37711 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37712 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37714 Here is the result:
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37718 \begin_inset Preview
37720 \begin_layout Standard
37725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37729 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37735 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37745 height_special "totalheight"
37750 backgroundcolor "none"
37753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37778 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37784 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 \begin_layout Standard
37807 Previewing works also for colors.
37808 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37827 is explained in section
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_layout Standard
37848 \begin_inset Preview
37850 \begin_layout Standard
37854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37873 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37878 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 \begin_layout Standard
37898 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37904 \begin_layout Standard
37905 If \SpecialChar LyX
37906 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37907 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37908 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37909 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37910 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37911 the \SpecialChar TeX
37913 If \SpecialChar LyX
37914 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37915 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37917 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37918 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37919 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37922 \begin_layout Subsection
37927 \begin_layout Standard
37928 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37929 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37932 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37939 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37941 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37943 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37944 's main window, then only this selection
37945 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37946 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37947 the source view window.
37952 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37953 ; but note that if you have
37954 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37956 not just the one which is open at the time.
37959 \begin_layout Section
37960 Advanced Find and Replace
37961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37963 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37968 \begin_inset Index idx
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37978 \begin_inset Index idx
37981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37990 \begin_layout Subsection
37994 \begin_layout Standard
37995 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37996 allows for searching of complex,
37997 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37999 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38000 The key-features are:
38003 \begin_layout Itemize
38004 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
38005 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
38006 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
38010 \begin_layout Itemize
38011 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
38012 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
38013 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
38014 a section heading will only be found within section headings
38017 \begin_layout Itemize
38018 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
38019 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
38020 outside of mathematics environments
38023 \begin_layout Itemize
38024 Search may be widened to a specific
38029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38036 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38037 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38044 \begin_layout Itemize
38045 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38046 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38051 \begin_inset space ~
38054 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38057 \begin_layout Subsection
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38064 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38077 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38080 ) or the toolbar button
38083 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38089 Advanced Find and Replace
38094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38104 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38113 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38116 arg "paragraph-break"
38120 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38121 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38125 arg "paragraph-break"
38128 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38132 searches backwards.
38135 \begin_layout Standard
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38144 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38153 \begin_inset space ~
38158 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38162 Searching for mathematics
38165 \begin_layout Standard
38166 Mathematical formulas, such as
38167 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38170 or something more complex like
38171 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38174 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38179 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38180 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38181 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38182 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38192 \begin_layout Standard
38193 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38194 This is done by switching to the
38198 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38203 This way, entering in the
38210 \begin_layout Itemize
38211 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
38212 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38215 \begin_layout Itemize
38216 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
38217 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
38220 \begin_layout Itemize
38221 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
38222 of it only within section headings.
38223 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
38224 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
38228 \begin_layout Itemize
38229 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
38230 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38237 \begin_layout Standard
38238 The entries made in the
38242 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38245 \begin_inset space ~
38251 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
38255 button or alternatively press
38258 arg "paragraph-break"
38265 while the cursor is in the
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38276 \begin_layout Standard
38277 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38279 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
38283 \begin_layout Itemize
38284 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
38285 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38293 with its typewriter version
38294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38308 \begin_layout Itemize
38309 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38315 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38327 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38334 (you may want to enable the
38337 \begin_inset space ~
38345 \begin_inset space ~
38350 options and disable the
38358 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38366 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38367 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38371 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38374 , or occurrences of
38375 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38379 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38385 \begin_layout Subsection
38389 \begin_layout Standard
38390 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38399 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38409 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38415 This is done with the context menu
38417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38418 Insert Regular Expression
38420 while the cursor is in the
38425 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38426 expression matching rules
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38441 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38442 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38448 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38449 same text in the document.
38450 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38451 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38454 \begin_layout Enumerate
38455 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38460 editor the fraction
38461 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38465 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38468 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38469 fractions with the given denominator.
38472 \begin_layout Enumerate
38473 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
38485 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38490 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38491 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38492 Also, by inserting a
38493 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38496 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38497 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38500 \begin_layout Standard
38501 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38502 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38503 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38506 , and referring back to them through
38507 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38511 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38515 For example, try searching with the regexp
38516 \begin_inset Newline newline
38519 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38522 \begin_inset Newline newline
38525 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38529 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38532 \begin_layout Standard
38533 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38541 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38542 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38543 sub-expressions is absolute.
38545 \begin_inset space ~
38549 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38552 always refers to the first occurrence of
38553 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38556 in all entered regexps.
38564 \begin_layout Section
38566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38568 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38573 \begin_inset Index idx
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38585 \begin_layout Standard
38587 has a built-in spell checker.
38590 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38597 key or the toolbar button
38600 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38603 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38604 beginning of the currently selected text.
38605 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38606 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38607 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38608 scrolled so that it is visible.
38609 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38610 n, if any could be found.
38611 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38615 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38616 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38619 \begin_layout Standard
38620 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38627 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38628 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38630 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38631 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38642 arg "dialog-show character"
38645 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38647 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38650 \begin_layout Standard
38651 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38652 can be downloaded from here:
38653 \begin_inset Newline newline
38657 \begin_inset Flex URL
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38664 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38665 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38666 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38674 \begin_inset Newline newline
38678 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38680 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38681 You should download
38684 \begin_inset space ~
38687 files for each language
38688 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38693 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38696 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38697 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38701 \begin_inset space ~
38704 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38705 's installation subfolder
38713 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38715 \begin_inset Newline newline
38718 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38719 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38720 but in most cases these are
38736 is the language code.
38739 \begin_layout Subsection
38743 \begin_layout Standard
38746 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38747 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38755 you can set the following things:
38758 \begin_layout Description
38760 \begin_inset space ~
38763 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38764 should use for spell checking.
38765 Depending on your platform,
38775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38777 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38795 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38798 \begin_layout Description
38800 \begin_inset space ~
38803 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38804 will always use the given language
38805 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38808 \begin_layout Description
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38813 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38819 \begin_inset space \space{}
38823 This should normally not be needed.
38826 \begin_layout Description
38828 \begin_inset space ~
38832 \begin_inset space ~
38835 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38847 \begin_layout Description
38849 \begin_inset space ~
38852 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38853 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38854 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38855 appear in a context menu.
38856 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38860 \begin_layout Description
38862 \begin_inset space ~
38866 \begin_inset space ~
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38873 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38877 \begin_layout Section
38879 \begin_inset Index idx
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38891 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38898 \begin_layout Standard
38900 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38901 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38913 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38923 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38925 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38926 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38927 which are available for many languages.
38930 \begin_layout Standard
38931 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38932 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38936 \begin_layout Subsection
38937 Setting up the thesaurus
38940 \begin_layout Standard
38949 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38953 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38958 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38964 \begin_inset space ~
38972 For instance, the US English files are named:
38975 \begin_layout Itemize
38979 \begin_layout Itemize
38983 \begin_layout Standard
38992 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38993 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38996 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38997 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38998 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39005 ) to the path where they are installed.
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39010 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39011 ies, typical locations are
39017 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39021 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39025 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39028 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39034 LibreOffice-<Version>
39041 On the Mac, the default location is
39043 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39044 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39045 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39046 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39047 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39048 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39056 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39057 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39058 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39062 \begin_layout Standard
39063 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39065 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39067 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
39070 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
39071 \begin_inset Newline newline
39075 \begin_inset Flex URL
39078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
39082 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39083 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
39084 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
39094 \begin_layout Standard
39095 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
39096 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39098 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39099 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39100 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39107 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39109 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
39110 and point \SpecialChar LyX
39114 \begin_layout Standard
39115 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
39117 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39120 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
39126 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39129 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39130 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39138 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39139 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39140 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39147 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39150 \begin_layout Subsection
39151 Using the thesaurus
39154 \begin_layout Standard
39155 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
39157 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39160 or the toolbar button
39163 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39166 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
39168 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
39170 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39171 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
39172 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
39181 ), related terms (such as
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39193 ), compounds (such as
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39205 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39214 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39217 \begin_layout Standard
39218 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
39219 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
39223 \begin_layout Standard
39224 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
39225 the dictionary, such as the above
39229 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
39230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39234 \begin_inset space \space{}
39237 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
39238 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
39239 For example, looking up the word form
39243 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
39248 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39253 \begin_inset space \space{}
39264 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
39265 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
39266 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
39269 \begin_layout Section
39271 \begin_inset Index idx
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39281 \begin_inset Index idx
39284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 Document ! Change Tracking
39291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39293 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39300 \begin_layout Standard
39301 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
39302 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39303 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39304 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39311 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39313 \begin_inset space ~
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39336 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39337 You can change the color in
39339 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39340 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39351 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39357 \begin_inset Index idx
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39361 Color ! Change tracking
39366 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39367 's status bar when the
39368 cursor is in changed text.
39369 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39372 arg "changes-merge"
39378 \begin_layout Standard
39379 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39381 \begin_inset Index idx
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 \begin_inset Graphics
39402 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39410 \begin_layout Standard
39411 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39417 \begin_layout Standard
39418 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39421 \begin_layout Standard
39422 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39428 \begin_layout Standard
39429 \begin_inset Tabular
39430 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39431 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39432 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39433 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39443 arg "changes-track"
39451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39459 \begin_inset space ~
39462 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 arg "changes-output"
39490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39501 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39511 \begin_inset space ~
39520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39541 Jumps to the next change
39547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39556 arg "change-accept"
39564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39572 \begin_inset space ~
39575 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39577 \begin_inset space ~
39586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39595 arg "change-reject"
39603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39614 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39616 \begin_inset space ~
39625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39634 arg "changes-merge"
39642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39653 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39655 \begin_inset space ~
39664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 arg "all-changes-accept"
39681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39692 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 arg "all-changes-reject"
39724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39732 \begin_inset space ~
39735 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39741 \begin_inset space ~
39750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39774 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39810 \begin_inset space ~
39826 \begin_layout Standard
39827 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39833 \begin_layout Standard
39834 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39854 \begin_layout Standard
39855 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39856 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39857 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39858 the next change after the current cursor position.
39859 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39860 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39861 step to the next change.
39862 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39866 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39867 to describe a change.
39870 \begin_layout Standard
39872 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39873 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39879 \begin_inset Index idx
39882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39899 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39905 \begin_layout Section
39906 Comparison of Documents
39907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39909 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39914 \begin_inset Index idx
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39918 Comparison of documents
39926 \begin_layout Standard
39927 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39930 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39934 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39935 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39937 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39939 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39964 \begin_inset space ~
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39985 enables the change tracking option
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40001 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40004 \begin_layout Section
40005 International Support
40006 \begin_inset Index idx
40009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40010 International support
40018 \begin_layout Standard
40019 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40020 with any language you want.
40021 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40022 up \SpecialChar LyX
40024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40026 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40034 \begin_layout Standard
40035 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40036 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40043 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40050 \begin_layout Subsection
40052 \begin_inset Index idx
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40062 \begin_inset Index idx
40065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40066 Document ! Settings
40072 \begin_inset Index idx
40075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40076 Document ! Language
40084 \begin_layout Standard
40087 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40088 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40091 dialog lets you set
40093 the language, the quote style and character encoding
40098 \begin_layout Standard
40103 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40113 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40114 For details about the different encoding options see section
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40121 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40128 \begin_layout Subsection
40129 Keyboard mapping configuration
40130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40132 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40139 \begin_layout Standard
40140 If you have for example a U.
40141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40144 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
40145 can use an alternate keymap.
40146 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40151 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40152 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40153 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40156 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40163 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40168 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
40169 which one you want to use.
40172 \begin_layout Standard
40173 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
40174 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
40175 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
40176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40179 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40180 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
40181 one to support the characters you want.
40182 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40189 \begin_layout Chapter
40192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40194 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40201 \begin_layout Standard
40202 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40203 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
40204 topic inside the user's guide.
40207 \begin_layout Section
40209 \begin_inset Index idx
40212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40221 \begin_layout Standard
40226 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40229 \begin_layout Subsection
40233 \begin_layout Standard
40234 Creates a new document.
40237 \begin_layout Subsection
40241 \begin_layout Standard
40242 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40243 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
40244 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40246 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
40247 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
40253 \begin_layout Subsection
40257 \begin_layout Standard
40261 \begin_layout Subsection
40265 \begin_layout Standard
40266 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40267 Click there on a file to open it.
40270 \begin_layout Subsection
40272 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
40276 \begin_layout Standard
40278 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
40279 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
40283 \begin_layout Subsection
40287 \begin_layout Standard
40288 Closes the current document.
40291 \begin_layout Subsection
40295 \begin_layout Standard
40296 Closes all opened documents.
40299 \begin_layout Subsection
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40304 Saves the actual document.
40307 \begin_layout Subsection
40311 \begin_layout Standard
40312 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40313 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40317 \begin_layout Subsection
40319 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40325 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40326 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40332 \begin_layout Subsection
40336 \begin_layout Standard
40337 Saves all opened documents.
40340 \begin_layout Subsection
40344 \begin_layout Standard
40345 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40348 \begin_layout Subsection
40352 \begin_layout Standard
40353 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40354 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40355 It is described in the section
40357 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40362 Additional Features
40367 \begin_layout Subsection
40371 \begin_layout Standard
40372 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40373 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40375 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40376 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40381 When using the menu entry
40384 \begin_inset space ~
40389 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40393 \begin_inset space ~
40397 \begin_inset space ~
40401 \begin_inset space ~
40406 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40407 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40410 \begin_layout Subsection
40412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40414 name "subsec:Export"
40421 \begin_layout Standard
40422 You can export your document to various file formats.
40423 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40425 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40426 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40427 during its configuration.
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40439 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40446 \begin_layout Description
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40455 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40460 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40461 \begin_inset Newline newline
40464 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40465 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40469 \begin_layout Description
40470 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
40476 \begin_layout Description
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40481 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
40487 \begin_layout Description
40488 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40489 's native DVI-format.
40490 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
40491 files paths or file names in your document.
40493 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40500 \begin_layout Description
40501 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
40502 in files paths or file names
40505 \begin_layout Description
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40514 ) DVI-format using the program
40516 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40519 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40531 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40539 \begin_layout Description
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40544 (cropped) the same as
40548 but with cropped page margins.
40551 \begin_layout Description
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40556 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40560 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40565 \begin_layout Description
40569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40577 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40585 \begin_layout Description
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40594 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40598 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40606 \begin_layout Description
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40619 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40620 source that is compilable with the program
40622 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40626 \begin_layout Description
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40635 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40636 source, additionally all images used in the document
40637 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40641 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40644 \begin_layout Description
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40653 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40654 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40655 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40663 \begin_layout Description
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40676 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40677 source that is compilable with the program
40683 \begin_layout Description
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40696 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40697 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40703 \begin_layout Description
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40708 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40709 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40715 \begin_inset space \space{}
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40739 represent the version number)
40742 \begin_layout Description
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40751 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40752 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40753 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40757 \begin_layout Description
40758 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40759 's internal XHTML engine
40762 \begin_layout Description
40764 \begin_inset space ~
40768 \begin_inset space ~
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40779 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40784 For the conversion the program
40793 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40796 \begin_layout Description
40797 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40802 \begin_layout Description
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40807 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40809 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40812 For the conversion the program
40821 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40824 \begin_layout Description
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40829 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40830 For the conversion the program
40839 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40842 \begin_layout Description
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40847 (cropped) the same as
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40855 but with cropped page margins
40858 \begin_layout Description
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40867 PDF-format using the program
40871 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40874 \begin_layout Description
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40882 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40895 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40900 \begin_inset space \space{}
40903 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40907 \begin_layout Description
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40916 PDF-format using the program
40918 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40921 , produces PDF-files directly
40924 \begin_layout Description
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40933 PDF-format using the program
40937 , produces PDF-files directly
40940 \begin_layout Description
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40949 PDF-format using the program
40953 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40956 \begin_layout Description
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40965 PDF-format using the program
40970 , produces PDF-files directly
40973 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_layout Description
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40998 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40999 and then exported as text using the program
41004 \begin_layout Description
41009 PostScript format using the program
41017 options see section
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41024 reference "subsec:General-output"
41031 \begin_layout Description
41032 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41033 source and also code in the statistical programming
41047 it is possible to use
41051 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41055 \begin_layout Standard
41056 If one of the menu entries
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41072 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41074 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41082 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41087 \begin_inset Index idx
41090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41091 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41100 \begin_layout Subsection
41104 \begin_layout Standard
41105 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
41106 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41115 reference "sec:Paths"
41120 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41129 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41130 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41131 's preferences as described in section
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41138 reference "subsec:Converters"
41145 \begin_layout Subsection
41146 New and Close Window
41149 \begin_layout Standard
41150 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41154 \begin_layout Subsection
41158 \begin_layout Standard
41159 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41162 \begin_layout Section
41164 \begin_inset Index idx
41167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41176 \begin_layout Subsection
41180 \begin_layout Standard
41181 Described in section
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41188 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41195 \begin_layout Subsection
41196 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
41199 \begin_layout Standard
41200 Described in section
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41207 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41214 \begin_layout Subsection
41218 \begin_layout Standard
41219 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41220 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
41223 \begin_layout Subsection
41227 \begin_layout Standard
41228 Selects the whole document.
41231 \begin_layout Subsection
41232 Find & Replace (Quick)
41235 \begin_layout Standard
41236 Described in section
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41243 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41250 \begin_layout Subsection
41251 Find & Replace (Advanced)
41254 \begin_layout Standard
41255 Described in section
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41262 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41269 \begin_layout Subsection
41270 Move Paragraph Up/Down
41273 \begin_layout Standard
41274 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
41278 \begin_layout Subsection
41280 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41286 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41287 Described in section
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41294 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41303 \begin_layout Subsection
41305 \begin_inset Index idx
41308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41309 Paragraph ! Settings
41317 \begin_layout Standard
41318 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41319 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41324 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41325 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41332 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41344 \begin_layout Subsection
41346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41350 \begin_layout Standard
41352 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41353 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41358 \begin_layout Enumerate
41360 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41361 Customize text properties by means of the
41367 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41370 ; this is described in section
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41377 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41384 \begin_layout Enumerate
41386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41387 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41389 Apply last settings
41392 \begin_layout Enumerate
41394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41395 Change the casing of selected text (
41410 \begin_layout Subsection
41412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41416 \begin_layout Standard
41418 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41419 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
41420 text styles (in the case of this document:
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41448 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41457 \begin_layout Subsection
41458 Table and Rows & Columns
41461 \begin_layout Standard
41462 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41463 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41464 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41467 \begin_layout Subsection
41471 \begin_layout Standard
41472 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41473 It will dissolve this inset.
41474 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
41478 \begin_layout Subsection
41482 \begin_layout Standard
41483 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41484 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41487 \begin_layout Subsection
41488 Increase/Decrease List Depth
41491 \begin_layout Standard
41492 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
41494 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41501 reference "sec:Nesting"
41506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41508 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41515 \begin_layout Section
41517 \begin_inset Index idx
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 \begin_layout Standard
41530 At the bottom of the
41534 menu the opened documents are listed.
41537 \begin_layout Subsection
41538 Open/Close all Insets
41541 \begin_layout Standard
41542 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41545 \begin_layout Subsection
41546 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41549 \begin_layout Standard
41550 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41553 \begin_layout Standard
41554 Math macros are described in the
41561 \begin_layout Subsection
41565 \begin_layout Standard
41566 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41573 reference "sec:Navigating"
41578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41580 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41587 \begin_layout Subsection
41591 \begin_layout Standard
41592 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41594 \begin_inset space ~
41598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41600 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41607 \begin_layout Subsection
41611 \begin_layout Standard
41612 Opens a window showing console messages.
41613 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41618 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41619 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41620 is processing the document.
41623 \begin_layout Subsection
41625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41627 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41632 \begin_inset Index idx
41635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41644 \begin_layout Standard
41645 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41647 All toolbars and the
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41668 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41670 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
41672 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
41676 \begin_layout Standard
41678 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41717 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41720 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
41724 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
41726 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
41740 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
41741 denoted in the menu with the suffix
41750 \begin_layout Standard
41755 state the toolbar is permanently shown
41756 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
41761 state it is never shown
41767 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41768 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41769 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41770 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41771 is inside a formula or table respectively
41772 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
41773 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
41778 \begin_layout Standard
41780 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41787 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41794 \begin_layout Subsection
41798 \begin_layout Standard
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset space ~
41810 \begin_inset space ~
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41827 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41828 's main window vertically while
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41835 \begin_inset space ~
41839 \begin_inset space ~
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41856 will split it horizontally.
41857 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41858 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41859 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41860 three or more documents at the same time.
41861 To close a split view, use the menu
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41876 \begin_layout Subsection
41880 \begin_layout Standard
41881 Closes a split view.
41884 \begin_layout Subsection
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41890 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41891 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41892 's main window fullscreen.
41893 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41894 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41897 \begin_layout Section
41899 \begin_inset Index idx
41902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41911 \begin_layout Subsection
41915 \begin_layout Standard
41916 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41923 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41934 \begin_layout Subsection
41936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41938 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41946 Here you can insert the following characters:
41949 \begin_layout Description
41954 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41957 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41958 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41959 -packages you have installed.
41960 You can get a complete display by checking
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset Newline newline
41973 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41981 Not all characters will be visible in the
41985 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41986 dialog (see section
41987 \begin_inset space ~
41991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41993 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41997 ) can display every character.
42005 \begin_layout Description
42006 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42010 \begin_layout Description
42012 \begin_inset space ~
42016 \begin_inset space ~
42019 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42026 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42033 \begin_layout Description
42035 \begin_inset space ~
42038 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42048 \begin_layout Description
42050 \begin_inset space ~
42053 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 \begin_layout Description
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42068 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42072 \begin_layout Description
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42077 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
42081 \begin_layout Description
42083 \begin_inset space ~
42087 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
42088 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
42094 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42099 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42105 \begin_inset space \space{}
42108 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42109 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42118 To insert a fraction use the command
42123 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42127 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42136 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42143 \begin_layout Description
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42148 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
42152 \begin_layout Description
42154 \begin_inset space ~
42158 \begin_inset Index idx
42161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 \begin_inset Index idx
42171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42172 Language ! Phonetic symbols
42177 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
42178 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
42180 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42186 \begin_inset Index idx
42189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42197 \begin_inset Newline newline
42200 More information about this feature can be found in the
42206 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42212 \begin_layout Description
42213 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42215 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
42216 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42220 \begin_layout Subsection
42224 \begin_layout Standard
42225 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42228 \begin_layout Description
42229 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
42230 \begin_inset script superscript
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42241 \begin_layout Description
42242 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
42243 \begin_inset script subscript
42245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42254 \begin_layout Description
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42259 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42266 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42273 \begin_layout Description
42275 \begin_inset space ~
42278 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42279 \begin_inset space ~
42283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42285 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42292 \begin_layout Description
42294 \begin_inset space ~
42297 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42304 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42311 \begin_layout Description
42313 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42318 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42324 \begin_inset space \space{}
42327 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42328 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42337 To insert a fraction use the command
42342 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42346 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42355 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42364 \begin_layout Description
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42369 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42376 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42383 \begin_layout Description
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42388 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42389 \begin_inset space ~
42393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42395 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42402 \begin_layout Description
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42407 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42414 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42421 \begin_layout Description
42422 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42429 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42436 \begin_layout Description
42438 \begin_inset space ~
42441 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42448 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42455 \begin_layout Description
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42460 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42461 \begin_inset space ~
42465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42467 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42474 \begin_layout Description
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42483 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42492 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42499 for a usage example.
42502 \begin_layout Description
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42511 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42518 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42525 \begin_layout Description
42527 \begin_inset space ~
42530 Break Inserts a forced line break that
42531 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
42534 justifies the remaining text as described in section
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42541 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42548 \begin_layout Description
42550 \begin_inset space ~
42553 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42554 \begin_inset space ~
42558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42560 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42567 \begin_layout Description
42569 \begin_inset space ~
42572 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42573 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42581 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42586 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
42590 \begin_layout Description
42592 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42594 \begin_inset space ~
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42601 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42602 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42610 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42619 \begin_layout Description
42621 \begin_inset space ~
42624 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42631 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42638 \begin_layout Description
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42647 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42648 \begin_inset space ~
42652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42654 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42661 \begin_layout Subsection
42663 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42669 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42670 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42671 The submenu allows you to insert
42674 \begin_layout Description
42676 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42678 \begin_inset space ~
42681 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42684 \begin_layout Description
42686 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42692 \begin_inset space ~
42695 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42699 \begin_layout Description
42701 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42706 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42709 \begin_layout Description
42711 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42716 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42719 \begin_layout Description
42721 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42730 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42734 \begin_layout Description
42736 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42738 \begin_inset space ~
42741 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42744 \begin_layout Description
42746 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42752 \begin_inset space ~
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42759 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42762 \begin_layout Description
42764 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42766 \begin_inset space ~
42769 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42771 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42772 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42778 \begin_layout Description
42780 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42782 \begin_inset space ~
42785 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42787 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42788 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42794 \begin_layout Description
42796 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42797 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42798 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42799 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42802 \begin_layout Subsection
42805 List/Contents/References
42808 \begin_layout Standard
42809 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42834 are described in section
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42841 reference "sec:toc"
42850 is described in section
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42857 reference "sec:Index"
42865 is described in section
42866 \begin_inset space ~
42870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42872 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42878 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42881 is described in section
42882 \begin_inset space ~
42886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42888 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42895 \begin_layout Subsection
42899 \begin_layout Standard
42900 To insert floats, as described in section
42901 \begin_inset space ~
42905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42907 reference "sec:Floats"
42911 and in detail the chapter
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_layout Subsection
42930 \begin_layout Standard
42931 To insert notes, described in section
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42938 reference "sec:Notes"
42945 \begin_layout Subsection
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42950 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42952 Branches are described in section
42953 \begin_inset space ~
42957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42959 reference "sec:Branches"
42966 \begin_layout Subsection
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42971 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42972 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42974 An example is the document class
42975 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42985 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42994 with three custom insets.
42997 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43001 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
43007 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
43010 \begin_layout Subsection
43012 \begin_inset Index idx
43015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43024 \begin_layout Standard
43025 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
43027 For more information see chapter
43029 External Document Parts
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43038 \begin_layout Subsection
43040 \begin_inset Index idx
43043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43052 \begin_layout Standard
43053 Inserts a box in a certain style.
43054 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
43061 \begin_inset space ~
43069 \begin_layout Subsection
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43078 dialog as described in section
43079 \begin_inset space ~
43083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43085 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43092 \begin_layout Subsection
43096 \begin_layout Standard
43101 as described in section
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43108 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43115 \begin_layout Subsection
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43124 as described in section
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43131 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43138 \begin_layout Subsection
43140 \begin_inset Index idx
43143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43150 \begin_inset Index idx
43153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43154 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43163 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43164 Floats are described in section
43165 \begin_inset space ~
43169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43171 reference "sec:Floats"
43175 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43178 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43194 \begin_layout Subsection
43198 \begin_layout Standard
43199 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43200 \begin_inset space ~
43204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43206 reference "sec:Index"
43213 \begin_layout Subsection
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43218 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43219 \begin_inset space ~
43223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43225 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43232 \begin_layout Subsection
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43238 Tables are described in section
43239 \begin_inset space ~
43243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43245 reference "sec:Tables"
43249 and in detail in the chapter
43256 \begin_inset space ~
43264 \begin_layout Subsection
43268 \begin_layout Standard
43274 Graphics are described in section
43275 \begin_inset space ~
43279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43281 reference "sec:Graphics"
43288 \begin_layout Subsection
43292 \begin_layout Standard
43293 Inserts a URL as described in section
43294 \begin_inset space ~
43298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43300 reference "subsec:URLs"
43307 \begin_layout Subsection
43311 \begin_layout Standard
43312 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43313 \begin_inset space ~
43317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43319 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43326 \begin_layout Subsection
43330 \begin_layout Standard
43331 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43332 \begin_inset space ~
43336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43338 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43345 \begin_layout Subsection
43349 \begin_layout Standard
43350 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43351 \begin_inset space ~
43355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43357 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43364 \begin_layout Subsection
43367 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43370 \begin_layout Standard
43371 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43372 environments of the same type.
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43380 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43384 for an explanation.
43387 \begin_layout Subsection
43391 \begin_layout Standard
43392 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43393 title or caption of a float.
43394 Inserts a short title as described in section
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43401 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43408 \begin_layout Subsection
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43414 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43415 Code box as described in section
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43422 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43429 \begin_layout Subsection
43431 \begin_inset Index idx
43434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43443 \begin_layout Standard
43444 Inserts a program listings box.
43445 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43447 Program Code Listings
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43460 \begin_layout Subsection
43462 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43466 \begin_layout Standard
43468 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43469 Inserts the actual date.
43470 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
43477 \begin_layout Subsection
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43489 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43496 \begin_layout Section
43498 \begin_inset Index idx
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \begin_layout Standard
43511 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43515 of the current document.
43516 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43519 \begin_layout Subsection
43523 \begin_layout Standard
43524 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43525 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43526 to jump, for example, between section
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43531 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43535 2.5 and use the submenu
43538 \begin_inset space ~
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43559 \begin_inset space ~
43565 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43569 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43575 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43578 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43581 \begin_layout Standard
43583 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
43584 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43595 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43603 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43606 \begin_layout Subsection
43607 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43610 \begin_layout Standard
43611 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43615 \begin_layout Subsection
43619 \begin_layout Standard
43620 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43621 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43622 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43638 \begin_layout Subsection
43642 \begin_layout Standard
43643 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43646 The \SpecialChar LyX
43647 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43649 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_inset space ~
43662 manual for a detailed description.
43665 \begin_layout Section
43667 \begin_inset Index idx
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43679 \begin_layout Subsection
43683 \begin_layout Standard
43684 Change Tracking is described in section
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43691 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43698 \begin_layout Subsection
43706 \begin_layout Standard
43707 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43708 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43709 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43711 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43712 to the clipboard or update the view.
43713 \begin_inset Newline newline
43716 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43720 \begin_layout Standard
43723 Open Containing Directory
43725 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43726 's temporary folder for the document.
43727 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43728 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43729 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43730 For example some journals require to send the
43734 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43738 \begin_layout Subsection
43739 Start Appendix Here
43742 \begin_layout Standard
43743 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43744 as described in section
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43751 reference "sec:Appendices"
43758 \begin_layout Subsection
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43766 \begin_layout Standard
43767 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43768 default output format for the document (menu
43770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43771 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43772 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43790 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43794 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43797 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43798 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43800 \begin_inset space ~
43803 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43805 \begin_inset space ~
43808 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43820 \begin_inset space ~
43824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43826 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43830 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43831 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43833 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43834 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43839 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43844 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43854 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43859 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43860 when it is first configured.
43861 The default output format is
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_layout Subsection
43873 View (Other Formats)
43876 \begin_layout Standard
43877 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43878 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43879 actual document with an external program.
43880 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43881 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43882 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43884 All possible formats are listed in section
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43891 reference "subsec:Export"
43896 You should at least see the menu entry
43901 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43903 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43905 \begin_inset space ~
43909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43911 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43916 \begin_inset Index idx
43919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43929 \begin_layout Standard
43930 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43931 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43933 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43934 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43939 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43941 \begin_inset space ~
43944 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43954 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43959 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43960 when it is first configured.
43963 \begin_layout Subsection
43965 \begin_inset space ~
43971 \begin_layout Standard
43972 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43973 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43976 \begin_layout Subsection
43977 Update (Other Formats)
43980 \begin_layout Standard
43981 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43982 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43985 \begin_layout Subsection
43986 View Master Document
43989 \begin_layout Standard
43990 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44011 manual for more information on this topic).
44012 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
44013 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44026 generates the output of the whole book, while
44030 will just output the chapter alone.
44033 \begin_layout Standard
44034 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44035 in the document settings (menu
44037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44039 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44057 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44061 ) or in the preferences (menu
44063 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44064 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44069 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44074 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44080 \begin_inset space ~
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44092 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44099 \begin_layout Subsection
44100 Update Master Document
44103 \begin_layout Standard
44104 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44120 \begin_inset space ~
44125 manual for more information on this topic).
44126 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
44127 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44130 \begin_layout Standard
44131 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44132 in the document settings (menu
44134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44135 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44136 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44138 \begin_inset space ~
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44154 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44158 ) or in the preferences (menu
44160 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44161 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44166 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44171 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44189 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44196 \begin_layout Subsection
44198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44200 name "subsec:Compressed"
44207 \begin_layout Standard
44208 Un/compresses the current document.
44209 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
44210 compression (see the
44212 Additional Features
44214 manual for details).
44217 \begin_layout Subsection
44221 \begin_layout Standard
44222 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44225 \begin_layout Subsection
44229 \begin_layout Standard
44230 The document settings are described in appendix
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44237 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44244 \begin_layout Section
44246 \begin_inset Index idx
44249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 \begin_layout Subsection
44262 \begin_layout Standard
44263 Spell checking is explained in section
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44270 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44277 \begin_layout Subsection
44281 \begin_layout Standard
44282 The thesaurus is described in section
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44289 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44296 \begin_layout Subsection
44298 \begin_inset Index idx
44301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44308 \begin_inset Index idx
44311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44320 \begin_layout Standard
44321 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44322 the highlighted document part.
44325 \begin_layout Subsection
44331 \begin_inset Index idx
44334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44335 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44344 \begin_layout Standard
44345 Generates with the help of the program
44347 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44350 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44351 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44352 This feature is not available on Windows.
44355 \begin_layout Subsection
44361 \begin_inset Index idx
44364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44374 \begin_layout Standard
44375 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44385 to see the full filename paths.
44388 \begin_layout Subsection
44390 \begin_inset Index idx
44393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44402 \begin_layout Standard
44403 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44404 files as described in section
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44411 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44418 \begin_layout Subsection
44420 \begin_inset Index idx
44423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 \begin_inset Index idx
44457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44458 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44467 \begin_layout Standard
44468 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44469 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
44470 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44471 -packages and programs it needs; see
44473 \begin_inset space ~
44477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44479 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44486 \begin_layout Subsection
44490 \begin_layout Standard
44495 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44496 \begin_inset space ~
44500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44502 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44509 \begin_layout Section
44511 \begin_inset Index idx
44514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 \begin_layout Standard
44524 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44525 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44527 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44531 \begin_layout Standard
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44540 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44541 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44542 packages and classes found
44543 by \SpecialChar LyX
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44551 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44558 \begin_layout Standard
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44567 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44572 \begin_layout Section
44574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44576 name "sec:Toolbars"
44583 \begin_layout Standard
44584 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44591 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44598 \begin_layout Standard
44599 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44600 This is described in the
44602 Additional Features
44607 \begin_layout Subsection
44609 \begin_inset Index idx
44612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44621 \begin_layout Standard
44622 \begin_inset Graphics
44623 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44632 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44638 \begin_layout Standard
44639 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44656 \begin_inset Note Note
44659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44660 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44665 manual for more information.
44673 \begin_layout Standard
44674 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44680 \begin_layout Standard
44681 \begin_inset Tabular
44682 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44683 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 \begin_inset Graphics
44692 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 pull-down box for the environments
44719 \begin_layout Standard
44720 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44726 \begin_layout Standard
44728 \begin_inset Tabular
44729 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44730 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44731 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44732 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44832 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44862 arg "spelling-continuously"
44870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44874 Spellcheck continuously
44880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44993 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45023 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45025 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
45030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45048 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45062 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45102 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45130 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45144 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45145 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
45152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 Emphasize text, function of the
45174 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
45177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45182 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
45190 arg "dialog-show character"
45201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45222 Set text to noun style, function of the
45223 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
45226 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45231 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
45239 arg "dialog-show character"
45250 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45256 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
45259 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
45267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45272 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
45275 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45288 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
45293 arg "textstyle-apply"
45303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
45309 Format text using the current settings in the
45311 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45313 \begin_inset space ~
45316 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45351 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45371 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45399 arg "tabular-insert"
45407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45429 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45442 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
45445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45461 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45473 Toggle outline window on/off,
45475 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45491 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 Toggle math toolbar on/off
45509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45518 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45530 Toggle table toolbar on/off
45543 \begin_layout Subsection
45545 \begin_inset Index idx
45548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45557 \begin_layout Standard
45558 \begin_inset Graphics
45559 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45567 \begin_layout Standard
45568 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45574 \begin_layout Standard
45575 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45579 \begin_layout Standard
45580 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45586 \begin_layout Standard
45587 \begin_inset Tabular
45588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
45589 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45590 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45591 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45682 arg "layout-toggle List"
45690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45709 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45736 arg "depth-increment"
45744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45752 \begin_inset space ~
45756 \begin_inset space ~
45765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 arg "depth-decrement"
45782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45790 \begin_inset space ~
45794 \begin_inset space ~
45803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 arg "float-insert figure"
45820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45827 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45843 arg "float-insert table"
45851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45858 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45904 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45934 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45980 \begin_inset space ~
45989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45998 arg "nomencl-insert"
46006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46014 \begin_inset space ~
46023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 arg "footnote-insert"
46040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46062 arg "marginalnote-insert"
46070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46111 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46113 \begin_inset space ~
46122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46131 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46207 \begin_inset space ~
46216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46240 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46271 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46273 \begin_inset space ~
46282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46291 arg "dialog-show character"
46299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46307 \begin_inset space ~
46310 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46328 arg "textstyle-apply"
46336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46341 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46342 Format text using the recent settings in the
46345 arg "dialog-show character"
46354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 arg "layout-paragraph"
46371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46377 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46397 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46425 \begin_layout Subsection
46426 View/Update Toolbar
46427 \begin_inset Index idx
46430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46431 Toolbar ! View / Update
46439 \begin_layout Standard
46440 \begin_inset Graphics
46441 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46448 \begin_layout Standard
46449 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46455 \begin_layout Standard
46456 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46460 \begin_layout Standard
46461 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46467 \begin_layout Standard
46468 \begin_inset Tabular
46469 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46470 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46471 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46472 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46512 arg "buffer-update"
46520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46542 arg "master-buffer-view"
46550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46558 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
46560 \begin_inset space ~
46566 \begin_inset space ~
46575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 arg "master-buffer-update"
46592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46600 \begin_inset space ~
46604 \begin_inset space ~
46613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46622 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46637 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46639 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
46641 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46644 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46645 Synchronize with Output
46651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46662 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46679 View (Other Formats)
46685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46692 arg "update-others"
46696 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46711 Update (Other Formats)
46724 \begin_layout Standard
46726 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46727 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46733 \begin_layout Subsection
46737 \begin_layout Standard
46738 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46739 \begin_inset space ~
46743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46745 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46749 , the table toolbar
46750 \begin_inset Index idx
46753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46762 \begin_inset space ~
46767 manual and the math macro toolbar
46768 \begin_inset Index idx
46771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 \begin_layout Chapter
46785 The Document Settings
46786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46788 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46793 \begin_inset Index idx
46796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46797 Document ! Settings
46805 \begin_layout Standard
46809 \begin_inset space ~
46814 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46815 is called with the menu
46817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46821 You can save your document settings as default with the
46823 Save as Document Defaults
46825 button in any dialog.
46826 This will create a template named
46830 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46831 when you create a new document without
46835 \begin_layout Standard
46840 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46841 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46844 \begin_layout Standard
46845 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46846 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46847 to find the one you are looking for.
46848 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46849 the submenus of the dialog.
46851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46855 \begin_inset space \space{}
46859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46866 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46867 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46868 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46871 \begin_layout Section
46875 \begin_layout Standard
46876 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46878 Document classes are described in section
46879 \begin_inset space ~
46883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46885 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46892 \begin_layout Standard
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46901 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46906 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46907 as a layout for a document class.
46908 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46910 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46919 \begin_layout Standard
46920 Some classes use special class options by default.
46921 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46925 and you can decide to use them or not.
46926 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46927 recommended you leave them untouched.
46932 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46933 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46938 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46940 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46946 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46947 \begin_inset Newline newline
46952 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46955 \begin_inset Newline newline
46958 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46959 distribution, see section
46964 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46966 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46979 \begin_layout Standard
46984 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46985 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46986 in the background if the child document
46987 is opened without its master.
46988 This way child documents are always compilable.
46989 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46996 \begin_inset space ~
47004 \begin_layout Standard
47005 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47016 \begin_inset Index idx
47019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47021 packages ! prettyref
47027 \begin_inset Index idx
47030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47032 packages ! refstyle
47037 for cross-references, see section
47038 \begin_inset space ~
47042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47044 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47051 \begin_layout Section
47055 \begin_layout Standard
47056 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
47057 Please refer to the section
47060 \begin_inset space ~
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47073 manual for details.
47076 \begin_layout Section
47080 \begin_layout Standard
47081 Modules are explained in section
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47088 reference "subsec:Modules"
47095 \begin_layout Section
47099 \begin_layout Standard
47101 \begin_inset space ~
47105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47107 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47114 \begin_layout Section
47118 \begin_layout Standard
47119 The document font settings are described in section
47120 \begin_inset space ~
47124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47126 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47133 \begin_layout Section
47137 \begin_layout Standard
47138 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47150 \begin_inset space ~
47155 and whether it should be a
47158 \begin_inset space ~
47163 can also be specified here.
47166 \begin_layout Standard
47167 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47168 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47169 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
47171 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
47174 \begin_layout Standard
47177 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47180 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47181 justifies the text on screen.
47182 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47184 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
47188 \begin_layout Standard
47190 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
47199 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
47204 \begin_layout Section
47208 \begin_layout Standard
47209 This dialog is described in sections
47210 \begin_inset space ~
47214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47216 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47223 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47230 \begin_layout Section
47234 \begin_layout Standard
47235 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47236 \begin_inset space ~
47240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47242 reference "subsec:Margins"
47249 \begin_layout Section
47251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47253 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47258 \begin_inset Index idx
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 Language ! Encoding
47270 \begin_layout Standard
47271 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47272 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47273 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47275 is always encoded in utf8).
47276 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
47277 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47278 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47279 -command is not known for
47280 a particular character).
47281 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
47285 \begin_layout Standard
47287 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
47288 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47289 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47290 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
47291 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
47292 's default encoding).
47293 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
47294 's Unicode support covers the
47295 characters of most scripts.
47296 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
47297 using one of the traditional, or
47298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47305 , encodings is necessary.
47308 \begin_layout Standard
47310 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
47312 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47315 Traditional (auto-selected)
47321 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47322 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47323 the given language(s).
47325 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47329 \begin_layout Standard
47331 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47332 If you use the option
47337 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47340 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47341 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47344 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47347 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47348 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47349 exactly one encoding.
47350 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47355 \begin_layout Standard
47357 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47358 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47364 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47365 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47369 \begin_layout Standard
47371 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47372 Finally, you can also select
47376 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47377 Note that this encoding is then used for
47382 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47383 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47387 \begin_layout Standard
47389 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47392 Do not load inputenc
47394 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47395 from automatically loading the
47402 \begin_inset Index idx
47405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47407 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47409 packages ! inputenc
47417 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47418 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47419 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47420 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47421 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47423 Note that this option is only available for the standard
47429 Traditional (auto-selected)
47436 \begin_layout Standard
47438 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
47440 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
47441 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
47442 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47443 installation supports Unicode), choose
47444 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47445 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47446 is quite incomplete, so
47447 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
47452 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47453 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47454 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
47455 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47456 -commands is not used, because all
47457 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47458 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47459 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47460 , two new alternative engines
47461 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47463 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47465 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47468 \begin_inset space ~
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47496 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47501 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47505 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
47510 \begin_layout Standard
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47519 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47520 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47530 The possible settings are:
47533 \begin_layout Description
47534 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47536 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47537 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47547 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47554 \begin_layout Description
47555 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47556 format you will use.
47557 In many cases this will be
47562 \begin_inset Index idx
47565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47573 If the newer package
47578 \begin_inset Index idx
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47583 packages ! polyglossia
47588 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47589 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47590 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47592 this package will be used instead of
47599 \begin_layout Description
47601 \begin_inset space ~
47612 would be more appropriate.
47615 \begin_layout Description
47616 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47617 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47621 (for German texts), type in
47624 \begin_inset Newline newline
47629 usepackage{ngerman}
47632 \begin_layout Description
47633 None will not use a language package.
47634 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47637 \begin_layout Standard
47638 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47641 \begin_layout Description
47643 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47645 \begin_inset space ~
47649 \begin_inset space ~
47653 \begin_inset space ~
47660 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47666 \begin_inset Index idx
47669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47671 packages ! inputenc
47677 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47678 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47679 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47685 \begin_layout Description
47686 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47688 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47689 commands, which may result in a big
47690 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47691 -commands are needed.
47693 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47694 This is the same as the
47707 \begin_layout Description
47709 \begin_inset space ~
47713 \begin_inset space ~
47716 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47719 \begin_layout Description
47721 \begin_inset space ~
47725 \begin_inset space ~
47728 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47731 \begin_layout Description
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47736 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47739 \begin_layout Description
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47748 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47749 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47752 \begin_layout Description
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47761 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47765 \begin_layout Description
47767 \begin_inset space ~
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47774 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47775 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47778 \begin_layout Description
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47788 \begin_inset space ~
47791 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47792 \begin_inset space ~
47798 \begin_layout Description
47800 \begin_inset space ~
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47808 \begin_inset space ~
47811 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47812 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47815 \begin_layout Description
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47821 \begin_inset space ~
47824 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47825 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47826 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47827 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47828 \begin_inset space ~
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47838 \begin_layout Description
47840 \begin_inset space ~
47844 \begin_inset space ~
47847 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47848 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47849 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47851 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47852 \begin_inset space ~
47856 \begin_inset space ~
47862 \begin_layout Description
47864 \begin_inset space ~
47868 \begin_inset space ~
47871 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47874 \begin_layout Description
47876 \begin_inset space ~
47880 \begin_inset space ~
47883 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47886 \begin_layout Description
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47892 \begin_inset space ~
47895 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47898 \begin_layout Description
47900 \begin_inset space ~
47903 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47906 \begin_layout Description
47908 \begin_inset space ~
47911 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47914 \begin_layout Description
47916 \begin_inset space ~
47920 \begin_inset space ~
47923 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47926 \begin_layout Description
47928 \begin_inset space ~
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47938 \begin_layout Description
47940 \begin_inset space ~
47944 \begin_inset space ~
47947 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47950 \begin_layout Description
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47956 \begin_inset space ~
47962 \begin_layout Description
47964 \begin_inset space ~
47968 \begin_inset space ~
47971 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47977 \begin_inset Index idx
47980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47987 , when using this, set the document language to
47992 \begin_layout Description
47994 \begin_inset space ~
47998 \begin_inset space ~
48001 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48006 , when using this, set the document language to
48009 \begin_inset space ~
48015 \begin_layout Description
48017 \begin_inset space ~
48021 \begin_inset space ~
48024 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48030 \begin_inset Index idx
48033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48035 packages ! japanese
48040 , when using this, set the document language to
48045 \begin_layout Description
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48054 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48059 , when using this, set the document language to
48064 \begin_layout Description
48066 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48073 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48078 , when using this, set the document language to
48083 \begin_layout Description
48085 \begin_inset space ~
48088 (EUC-KR) for Korean
48091 \begin_layout Description
48093 \begin_inset space ~
48097 \begin_inset space ~
48101 \begin_inset space ~
48104 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
48107 \begin_layout Description
48109 \begin_inset space ~
48113 \begin_inset space ~
48117 \begin_inset space ~
48120 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
48121 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
48122 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
48125 \begin_layout Description
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48131 \begin_inset space ~
48137 \begin_layout Description
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48143 \begin_inset space ~
48146 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
48147 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
48150 \begin_layout Description
48152 \begin_inset space ~
48156 \begin_inset space ~
48159 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48165 \begin_inset Index idx
48168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48175 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
48176 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
48178 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48179 with the default encoding (
48181 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48187 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
48188 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48193 \begin_layout Description
48195 \begin_inset space ~
48203 \begin_inset space ~
48206 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48213 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48216 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48223 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48224 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48226 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48229 \begin_layout Description
48231 \begin_inset space ~
48235 \begin_inset space ~
48238 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48244 \begin_inset Index idx
48247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48255 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
48258 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48260 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
48261 This used to be more comprehensive than
48264 \begin_inset space ~
48269 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
48274 \begin_layout Description
48276 \begin_inset space ~
48279 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48285 \begin_inset Index idx
48288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48290 packages ! inputenc
48297 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
48298 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
48300 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
48301 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48302 with the default encoding (
48304 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48310 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
48311 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48316 \begin_layout Description
48318 \begin_inset space ~
48322 \begin_inset space ~
48326 \begin_inset space ~
48329 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48330 \begin_inset space ~
48336 \begin_layout Description
48338 \begin_inset space ~
48342 \begin_inset space ~
48346 \begin_inset space ~
48349 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48350 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48351 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48355 \begin_layout Description
48357 \begin_inset space ~
48361 \begin_inset space ~
48365 \begin_inset space ~
48368 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48369 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48372 \begin_layout Section
48374 \begin_inset Index idx
48377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48384 \begin_inset Index idx
48387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48394 \begin_inset Index idx
48397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48398 Color ! Shaded boxes
48404 \begin_inset Index idx
48407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48408 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48416 \begin_layout Standard
48417 Here you can alter the font color for the
48421 (default: black), for
48424 \begin_inset space ~
48429 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
48433 (default: white) and for
48436 \begin_inset space ~
48446 sets the color back to the default.
48449 \begin_layout Standard
48450 Clicking any button showing
48458 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
48459 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48460 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
48461 later more quickly.
48464 \begin_layout Standard
48465 Note, if you change the
48468 \begin_inset space ~
48473 font color and use the option
48476 \begin_inset space ~
48481 in the document settings under
48484 \begin_inset space ~
48489 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48490 \begin_inset space ~
48494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48496 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48503 \begin_layout Standard
48504 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48510 \begin_layout Standard
48514 \begin_inset space ~
48523 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48526 \begin_inset space ~
48529 Code after a forced page break:
48532 \begin_layout Itemize
48533 For the page color:
48534 \begin_inset Newline newline
48541 pagecolor{color name}
48544 \begin_layout Itemize
48545 For the text color:
48546 \begin_inset Newline newline
48556 \begin_layout Standard
48557 You are restricted to one of
48593 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48600 \begin_inset space ~
48606 \begin_inset Newline newline
48609 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48610 names to refer to them:
48613 \begin_layout Itemize
48619 \begin_inset Newline newline
48624 page_backgroundcolor
48627 \begin_layout Itemize
48631 \begin_inset space ~
48637 \begin_inset Newline newline
48645 \begin_layout Itemize
48649 \begin_inset space ~
48655 \begin_inset Newline newline
48663 \begin_layout Itemize
48667 \begin_inset space ~
48673 \begin_inset Newline newline
48681 \begin_layout Standard
48682 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48685 \begin_inset space ~
48693 \begin_inset space ~
48701 \begin_layout Section
48703 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48707 \begin_layout Standard
48709 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48710 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48711 \begin_inset space ~
48715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48717 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48725 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48726 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48729 \begin_layout Standard
48731 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48732 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48734 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48737 \begin_layout Section
48741 \begin_layout Standard
48742 Here you can adjust the
48746 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48750 as described in section
48751 \begin_inset space ~
48755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48757 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48762 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48766 \begin_layout Standard
48768 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48769 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48771 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
48772 this package can be used as well.
48773 The most common one are:
48776 \begin_layout Description
48778 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48779 right Line numbers to the right margin
48782 \begin_layout Description
48784 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48785 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48789 \begin_layout Description
48791 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48792 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48795 \begin_layout Description
48797 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48798 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48801 \begin_layout Description
48803 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48804 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48807 \begin_layout Description
48809 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48811 \begin_inset space ~
48814 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48819 \begin_layout Section
48823 \begin_layout Standard
48824 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48830 \begin_inset Index idx
48833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48835 packages ! biblatex
48845 \begin_inset Index idx
48848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 \begin_inset Index idx
48863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48871 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48874 Sectioned bibliography
48876 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48882 \begin_inset Index idx
48885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 packages ! bibtopic
48897 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48898 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48902 for the generation of the bibliography.
48903 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48904 \begin_inset space ~
48908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48910 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48917 \begin_layout Section
48921 \begin_layout Standard
48922 Here you can define the
48926 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48928 \begin_inset space ~
48932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48934 reference "sec:Index"
48941 \begin_layout Section
48945 \begin_layout Standard
48946 The PDF properties are explained in section
48947 \begin_inset space ~
48951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48953 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48960 \begin_layout Section
48964 \begin_layout Standard
48965 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48966 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48972 \begin_inset Index idx
48975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48987 \begin_inset Index idx
48990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 \begin_inset Index idx
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 \begin_inset Index idx
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49032 \begin_inset Index idx
49035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49037 packages ! mathdots
49047 \begin_inset Index idx
49050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49052 packages ! mathtools
49062 \begin_inset Index idx
49065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49077 \begin_inset Index idx
49080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49082 packages ! stackrel
49092 \begin_inset Index idx
49095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49097 packages ! stmaryrd
49107 \begin_inset Index idx
49110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49112 packages ! undertilde
49117 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
49120 \begin_layout Description
49121 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49122 -errors in formulas,
49123 ensure that you have this enabled.
49126 \begin_layout Description
49127 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
49128 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49129 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
49133 \begin_layout Description
49134 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
49137 \begin_inset space ~
49149 \begin_layout Description
49150 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
49153 \begin_inset space ~
49165 \begin_layout Description
49166 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
49177 \begin_layout Description
49178 mathtools is used for the math commands
49214 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
49221 \begin_layout Description
49222 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
49224 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49233 \begin_layout Description
49234 stackrel is used for the math command
49251 \begin_layout Description
49252 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49255 \begin_layout Description
49256 undertilde is used for the math command
49264 Accents for one Character
49273 \begin_layout Section
49275 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
49277 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
49283 \begin_layout Standard
49285 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
49286 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
49289 \begin_layout Standard
49291 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
49292 The float placement options
49293 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
49296 are described in the section
49299 \begin_inset space ~
49303 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
49305 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
49313 \begin_inset space ~
49321 \begin_layout Section
49325 \begin_layout Standard
49326 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49328 Program Code Listings
49333 \begin_inset space ~
49341 \begin_layout Section
49345 \begin_layout Standard
49346 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49354 set to be used and set the
49359 The itemize environment is described in section
49360 \begin_inset space ~
49364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49366 reference "sec:Itemize"
49373 \begin_layout Standard
49374 You can furthermore specify a
49377 \begin_inset space ~
49382 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49383 command of the desired character.
49384 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49391 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49397 \begin_inset space \space{}
49401 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49411 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49412 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49415 \begin_layout Standard
49416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49424 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49425 -packages in the preamble (menu
49428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49432 \begin_inset space ~
49438 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49442 usepackage{textcomp}
49445 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49449 usepackage{amssymb}
49459 \begin_layout Section
49463 \begin_layout Standard
49464 Branches are described in section
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49471 reference "sec:Branches"
49478 \begin_layout Section
49480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49482 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49489 \begin_layout Standard
49490 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49493 \begin_layout Description
49495 \begin_inset space ~
49499 \begin_inset space ~
49502 Format: The format that is used when you enter
49503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49522 View Master Document
49523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49530 Update Master Document
49531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49538 menu or the toolbar.
49539 The default is set in
49541 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49542 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49544 \begin_inset space ~
49547 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49551 \begin_inset space ~
49555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49557 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49564 \begin_layout Description
49566 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
49568 \begin_inset space ~
49572 \begin_inset space ~
49576 \begin_inset space ~
49579 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
49584 option which is needed with some packages.
49585 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
49586 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
49589 \begin_layout Description
49591 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
49593 \begin_inset space ~
49597 \begin_inset space ~
49600 Options offers settings for the
49608 \begin_layout Itemize
49612 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
49614 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
49616 \begin_inset space ~
49622 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
49624 \begin_inset space ~
49628 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
49634 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
49636 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
49637 settings for the menu
49639 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49643 \begin_inset space ~
49647 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49650 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49651 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49656 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49658 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49660 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49663 or a detailed description see section
49665 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49670 \begin_inset space ~
49676 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49680 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49684 \begin_layout Itemize
49686 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49689 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49691 determines whether so-called
49692 \begin_inset Quotes els
49696 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49700 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49702 \begin_inset Quotes els
49706 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49709 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49710 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49711 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49713 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49715 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49716 macros, you can uncheck this.
49717 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49724 \begin_layout Description
49726 \begin_inset space ~
49730 \begin_inset space ~
49733 Options offers settings for the export format
49741 \begin_inset space ~
49746 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49747 \begin_inset space ~
49750 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49754 \begin_inset space ~
49759 settings are described in detail in section
49761 Math Output in XHTML
49766 \begin_inset space ~
49775 \begin_inset space ~
49779 \begin_inset space ~
49784 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49787 \begin_layout Description
49789 \begin_inset space ~
49794 Save transient properties
49796 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49797 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49798 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49802 \begin_layout Itemize
49803 the activation of change tracking
49806 \begin_layout Itemize
49807 the output of tracked changes
49810 \begin_layout Itemize
49811 the recording of the document directory path.
49814 \begin_layout Standard
49815 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49816 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49820 \begin_layout Section
49828 \begin_layout Standard
49829 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49831 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49833 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49835 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49839 \begin_layout Standard
49840 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49841 -syntax is given in section
49842 \begin_inset space ~
49846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49848 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49855 \begin_layout Chapter
49861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49863 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49868 \begin_inset Index idx
49871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49880 \begin_layout Standard
49881 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49883 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49887 It has the following submenus.
49890 \begin_layout Section
49894 \begin_layout Subsection
49898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49899 User Interface File
49900 \begin_inset Index idx
49903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49904 Customization ! of toolbars
49910 \begin_inset Index idx
49913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49914 Customization ! of menus
49922 \begin_layout Standard
49923 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49924 interface (ui) file.
49925 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49933 \begin_layout Description
49938 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49941 \begin_layout Description
49948 the menu entries in popup context menus
49951 \begin_layout Description
49956 specifies the toolbar buttons
49959 \begin_layout Standard
49960 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49961 and edit the entries.
49964 \begin_layout Standard
49965 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49977 entries must be finished with an explicit
50002 and in the case of the
50003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50015 The syntax for the entries is:
50018 \begin_layout Standard
50019 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50048 \begin_layout Standard
50050 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50053 All the \SpecialChar LyX
50054 -functions are listed in the menu
50056 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
50058 \begin_inset space ~
50066 \begin_layout Standard
50067 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50073 \begin_layout Standard
50074 For example, assuming you use the menu
50076 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50079 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
50083 \begin_layout Standard
50084 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50108 \begin_layout Standard
50110 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50125 to have the sixth bookmark.
50128 \begin_layout Standard
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50137 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
50138 's toolbar buttons.
50139 The currently available icon sets are compared in
50140 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50143 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
50151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50155 \begin_layout Standard
50158 Enable tool tips in main work area
50160 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
50164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50168 \begin_layout Standard
50173 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
50174 should display in the menu
50176 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50178 \begin_inset space ~
50186 \begin_layout Subsection
50190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50194 \begin_layout Standard
50197 Restore window layouts and geometries
50200 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
50201 the last \SpecialChar LyX
50205 \begin_layout Standard
50208 Restore cursor positions
50210 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
50214 \begin_layout Standard
50217 Load opened files from last session
50219 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50223 \begin_layout Standard
50226 Clear all session information
50228 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
50229 sessions (cursor positions, names
50230 of last opened documents, etc.).
50233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50237 name "subsec:Backup documents"
50242 \begin_inset Index idx
50245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50254 \begin_layout Standard
50257 Backup original documents when saving
50259 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
50260 it was saved the last time.
50261 It is stored in the
50264 \begin_inset space ~
50270 \begin_inset space ~
50274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50276 reference "sec:Paths"
50280 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
50283 \begin_inset space ~
50289 The backup file has the file extension
50290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50304 \begin_layout Standard
50307 Backup documents, every
50309 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50312 \begin_layout Standard
50315 Save documents compressed by default
50317 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50318 \begin_inset space ~
50322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50324 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50329 This applies to newly created documents only.
50330 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50334 Windows & work area
50337 \begin_layout Standard
50340 Open documents in tabs
50342 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50346 \begin_layout Standard
50351 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50358 \begin_inset space ~
50362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50364 reference "sec:Paths"
50368 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50375 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50376 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50377 of \SpecialChar LyX
50379 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50380 instance is created for each file.
50383 \begin_layout Standard
50386 Single close-tab button
50388 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50398 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50399 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50400 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50404 \begin_layout Standard
50405 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50413 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50414 before the change takes effect.
50422 \begin_layout Standard
50427 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
50429 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50431 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50435 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
50436 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50437 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50440 \begin_layout Subsection
50442 \begin_inset Index idx
50445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50454 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50461 \begin_layout Standard
50462 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50466 \begin_layout Standard
50467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50475 This section only deals with the fonts
50479 the \SpecialChar LyX
50481 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
50484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50485 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50496 \begin_layout Standard
50497 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
50514 (depends on the system) as its
50517 \begin_inset space ~
50533 \begin_layout Standard
50534 You can change the font size with the
50541 \begin_layout Standard
50546 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50551 points have the size of 1
50552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50556 \begin_inset space ~
50560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50562 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50567 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50572 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50573 \begin_inset space ~
50577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50579 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50586 \begin_layout Subsection
50588 \begin_inset Index idx
50591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50592 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
50599 \begin_inset Index idx
50602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50611 \begin_layout Standard
50612 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50613 by choosing an item in the
50614 list and selecting the
50621 \begin_layout Standard
50622 By checking the option
50626 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50629 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50630 \begin_inset space ~
50634 \begin_inset space ~
50639 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50642 \begin_layout Subsection
50644 \begin_inset Index idx
50647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50656 \begin_layout Standard
50657 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50661 \begin_layout Standard
50666 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50667 This feature is described in section
50668 \begin_inset space ~
50672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50674 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50681 \begin_layout Standard
50682 Checking the option
50685 \begin_inset space ~
50689 \begin_inset space ~
50693 \begin_inset space ~
50698 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50701 \begin_layout Section
50703 \begin_inset Index idx
50706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50715 \begin_layout Subsection
50719 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50723 \begin_layout Standard
50726 Cursor follows scrollbar
50728 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50732 \begin_layout Standard
50733 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50734 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50735 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50738 \begin_layout Standard
50741 Scroll below end of document
50743 is self-explanatory.
50746 \begin_layout Standard
50747 In \SpecialChar LyX
50748 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50755 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50757 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50758 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50759 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50763 \begin_layout Standard
50765 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
50768 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50770 is only relevant in documents that
50775 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
50784 markup) with this option selected.
50785 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
50787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50791 \begin_inset Quotes els
50795 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50799 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50800 dissolving from insets.
50805 track changes, pasted text is
50810 \begin_inset Quotes els
50814 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50817 notwithstanding the state of this option.
50822 \begin_layout Standard
50825 Sort environments alphabetically
50827 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50830 \begin_layout Standard
50833 Group environments by their category
50835 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50838 \begin_layout Standard
50843 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50852 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50856 \begin_layout Standard
50858 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50861 Search drive for cited files
50863 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50864 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50867 \begin_inset space ~
50871 \begin_inset space ~
50875 \begin_inset space ~
50879 \begin_inset space ~
50882 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50885 context menu on a citation.
50890 field determines the search pattern.
50892 \begin_inset space ~
50896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50898 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50911 \begin_layout Standard
50912 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50917 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50918 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50922 \begin_layout Subsection
50924 \begin_inset Index idx
50927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50934 \begin_inset Index idx
50937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50938 Settings ! Shortcuts
50946 \begin_layout Standard
50951 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50953 Several binding files are available, among them:
50956 \begin_layout Description
50957 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50960 \begin_layout Description
50961 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50973 \begin_layout Description
50974 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50985 \begin_layout Standard
50986 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50991 , and binding files for special languages.
50992 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50997 \begin_inset space \space{}
51001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51009 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
51010 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
51011 will try to use the appropriate binding
51015 \begin_layout Standard
51016 Some binding files, like
51020 , only have a limited scope.
51021 When looking at the end of the file
51025 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
51028 \begin_layout Standard
51032 \begin_inset space ~
51036 \begin_inset space ~
51041 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
51042 in the selected key binding file.
51045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51049 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
51054 \begin_inset Index idx
51057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51058 Key Bindings ! Editing
51066 \begin_layout Standard
51067 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
51068 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
51069 functions and the bound shortcuts.
51070 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
51073 Show key-bindings containing
51076 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
51077 Insert there for example as keyword
51078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51085 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
51086 functions that contain
51087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51095 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
51096 All \SpecialChar LyX
51097 functions are also listed in the file
51102 that you will find in the
51109 \begin_layout Standard
51110 For example, to add the shortcut
51118 , select the function and press the
51123 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
51124 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
51127 \begin_layout Standard
51128 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
51129 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
51134 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
51136 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
51141 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
51144 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
51148 \begin_layout Standard
51149 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
51152 \begin_layout Standard
51153 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
51155 The syntax of the entries is:
51158 \begin_layout Standard
51164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51183 \begin_layout Standard
51184 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
51185 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
51186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51213 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
51214 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
51215 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
51216 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
51218 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
51222 , you needed to specify it as
51227 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
51230 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
51233 \begin_layout Subsection
51235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51237 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
51242 \begin_inset Index idx
51245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51252 \begin_inset Index idx
51255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51256 Settings ! Keyboard Map
51264 \begin_layout Standard
51265 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
51266 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
51267 provides keyboard maps.
51268 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
51269 is a Romanian one, you can enable
51272 \begin_inset space ~
51276 \begin_inset space ~
51281 and select the keyboard map file named
51288 \begin_layout Standard
51297 keyboard map and, if you use the
51301 bindings, you can select the first and second with
51304 arg "keymap-primary"
51310 arg "keymap-secondary"
51313 respectively or toggle between them with
51316 arg "keymap-toggle"
51322 \begin_layout Standard
51323 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51331 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51340 \begin_layout Standard
51341 You can also specify the mouse
51343 Wheel scrolling speed
51346 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51350 Middle mouse button pasting
51352 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51353 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51356 \begin_layout Standard
51364 \begin_inset space ~
51368 \begin_inset space ~
51373 you can select a key for zooming.
51374 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51377 \begin_layout Subsection
51381 \begin_layout Standard
51382 Input completion is described in section
51383 \begin_inset space ~
51387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51389 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51396 \begin_layout Section
51398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51405 \begin_inset Index idx
51408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51415 \begin_inset Index idx
51418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51427 \begin_layout Standard
51428 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51429 are normally determined during
51431 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51434 \begin_layout Description
51436 \begin_inset space ~
51439 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51440 's working directory.
51441 It is the default when you
51452 \begin_inset space ~
51460 \begin_layout Description
51462 \begin_inset space ~
51465 templates This directory
51466 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
51467 contains the templates that are shown
51468 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
51469 will be opened when you use the menu
51470 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
51475 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51477 \begin_inset space ~
51481 \begin_inset space ~
51489 \begin_layout Description
51491 \begin_inset space ~
51494 files This directory
51495 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
51496 will be opened when you use the
51497 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
51498 contains the example files that are listed in
51501 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
51510 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51512 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
51514 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
51520 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
51522 \begin_inset Newline newline
51526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51538 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51539 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51549 \begin_layout Description
51551 \begin_inset space ~
51555 \begin_inset Index idx
51558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51564 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51565 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51566 \begin_inset space ~
51570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51572 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51580 will be used to save the backups.
51581 \begin_inset Newline newline
51584 Backup files have the ending
51585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51595 \begin_layout Description
51597 \begin_inset space ~
51600 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51601 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51603 \begin_inset Newline newline
51610 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51616 You can edit this file with the program
51625 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51626 in its preferences under
51629 \begin_inset space ~
51635 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51640 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51642 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51643 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51649 and \SpecialChar LyX
51650 need to be running the same time.
51651 \begin_inset Newline newline
51654 The pipe is also used for the
51658 feature, see section
51659 \begin_inset space ~
51663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51665 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51670 \begin_inset Newline newline
51673 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51674 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51675 \begin_inset Newline newline
51691 \begin_layout Description
51693 \begin_inset space ~
51696 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51699 \begin_layout Description
51701 \begin_inset space ~
51704 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51705 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51706 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51709 \begin_layout Description
51711 \begin_inset space ~
51714 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51720 You only need to specify it if you are using
51724 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51726 For \SpecialChar LyX
51731 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51735 \begin_layout Description
51737 \begin_inset space ~
51740 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51741 When \SpecialChar LyX
51742 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51743 to find it on the system.
51744 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51746 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51755 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51756 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51759 \begin_layout Description
51761 \begin_inset space ~
51764 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51765 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51766 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51767 code or in the document
51769 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51771 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51772 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51773 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51774 scanned for the input files.
51775 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51776 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51778 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51779 compilation may fail for some documents.
51782 \begin_layout Section
51786 \begin_layout Standard
51787 Here you can insert your
51796 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51798 \begin_inset space ~
51802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51804 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51808 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51811 \begin_layout Section
51813 \begin_inset Index idx
51816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51817 Language ! Settings
51823 \begin_inset Index idx
51826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51827 Settings ! Language
51835 \begin_layout Subsection
51837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51839 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51846 \begin_layout Description
51848 \begin_inset space ~
51852 \begin_inset space ~
51855 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51857 You can find its actual translation status here:
51858 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51860 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51866 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51872 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51873 LaTeX Language Support
51878 \begin_layout Description
51880 \begin_inset space ~
51883 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51884 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51885 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51886 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51903 The most widespread language package is
51908 \begin_inset Index idx
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51918 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51920 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51921 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51922 come with the alternative
51928 \begin_inset Index idx
51931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51933 packages ! polyglossia
51938 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51939 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51945 The available selections are described in section
51946 \begin_inset space ~
51950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51952 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51959 \begin_layout Description
51961 \begin_inset space ~
51965 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51966 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51967 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51969 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51973 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51977 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51979 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51983 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51984 that is used to switch to a different language
51985 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51986 to start the package
51990 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51991 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51995 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51996 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51999 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52003 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52011 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
52019 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
52022 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
52024 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52028 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52046 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52047 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52054 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
52055 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52060 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52065 , this setting is ignored.
52070 \begin_layout Description
52072 \begin_inset space ~
52076 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
52083 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
52084 Use this if the language switch set in
52088 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
52092 's alternative command
52096 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
52097 \SpecialChar allowbreak
52100 end{otherlanguage*}
52104 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
52105 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
52106 command toggles the package on and off
52107 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
52108 Empty by default, as
52112 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52114 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
52119 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52125 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
52130 , this setting is ignored.
52135 \begin_layout Description
52137 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52139 \begin_inset space ~
52143 \begin_inset space ~
52146 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
52150 \begin_layout Description
52152 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52154 \begin_inset space ~
52158 \begin_inset space ~
52161 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52167 \begin_layout Description
52169 \begin_inset space ~
52173 \begin_inset space ~
52177 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
52179 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
52182 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
52183 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
52186 to the document class options
52187 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
52188 rather than the language package options.
52189 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
52193 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
52194 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
52196 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
52197 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
52199 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
52204 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
52205 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
52214 \begin_layout Description
52216 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
52218 \begin_inset space ~
52222 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
52224 \begin_inset space ~
52228 \begin_inset space ~
52232 \begin_inset space ~
52238 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
52240 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
52243 this option is set,
52244 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
52245 the language switch defined in
52248 \begin_inset space ~
52253 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
52254 to the document language.
52255 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
52256 This might be needed if you use a non-default
52259 \begin_inset space ~
52264 or if a package resets the document language.
52265 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
52266 usually should be the document language).
52267 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
52268 documents start with the chosen document language.
52269 When this option is not set, the
52272 \begin_inset space ~
52277 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52279 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
52282 \begin_inset space ~
52292 \begin_layout Description
52294 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
52296 \begin_inset space ~
52300 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
52302 \begin_inset space ~
52306 \begin_inset space ~
52310 \begin_inset space ~
52316 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52320 \begin_inset space ~
52324 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52325 Set document language explicitly
52331 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52333 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52339 \begin_inset space ~
52345 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52347 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52351 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52353 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52356 the end of the document.
52357 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52362 \paragraph_spacing single
52364 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52370 \begin_layout Description
52372 \begin_inset space ~
52376 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52378 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52382 \begin_inset space ~
52386 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52388 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52390 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52394 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52397 in a language different
52398 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52400 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52403 the document language will be
52404 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52405 marked (by default with a blue
52408 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
52410 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
52414 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
52418 \begin_layout Description
52420 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
52422 \begin_inset space ~
52426 \begin_inset space ~
52430 \begin_inset space ~
52433 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
52434 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
52435 switched via the operating system.
52436 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
52438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52441 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
52442 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
52447 \begin_layout Description
52449 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
52451 \begin_inset space ~
52455 \begin_inset space ~
52458 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
52459 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
52464 \begin_layout Description
52466 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52468 \begin_inset space ~
52472 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
52474 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52478 \begin_inset space ~
52482 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
52483 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
52484 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
52486 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
52490 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
52492 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
52493 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
52495 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52496 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
52497 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
52499 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
52504 \begin_layout Standard
52509 means that the cursor
52510 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
52511 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
52512 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
52514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52517 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
52518 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
52522 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
52524 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
52525 specific case always means: move
52529 in text (even if this means:
52535 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52536 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
52537 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
52538 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
52539 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
52540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52551 \begin_layout Standard
52553 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
52558 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
52559 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
52560 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
52564 ) when coming from the left.
52565 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
52567 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52568 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52569 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
52574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52576 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
52580 \begin_layout Description
52582 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
52584 \begin_inset space ~
52588 \begin_inset space ~
52591 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
52592 separator alignment).
52593 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
52595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52598 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
52599 (static) custom character here.
52602 \begin_layout Description
52604 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
52606 \begin_inset space ~
52610 \begin_inset space ~
52613 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52619 \begin_layout Subsection
52623 \begin_layout Standard
52624 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
52625 \begin_inset space ~
52629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52631 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52638 \begin_layout Section
52642 \begin_layout Subsection
52644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52646 name "subsec:General-output"
52653 \begin_layout Description
52655 \begin_inset space ~
52658 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52660 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52662 \begin_inset space ~
52668 For a detailed description see section
52670 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52675 \begin_inset space ~
52683 \begin_layout Description
52685 \begin_inset space ~
52688 Options Options for the program
52692 that is used for the export format
52697 \begin_inset space ~
52701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52703 reference "subsec:Export"
52708 Possible options are listed in the
52713 \begin_inset Newline newline
52717 \begin_inset Flex URL
52720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52722 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52732 \begin_layout Description
52734 \begin_inset space ~
52738 \begin_inset space ~
52741 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52744 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52745 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52747 \begin_inset space ~
52753 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52756 \begin_layout Description
52758 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52760 \begin_inset space ~
52764 \begin_inset Index idx
52767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52774 \begin_inset Index idx
52777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52778 Settings ! Date format
52783 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52784 \begin_inset Newline newline
52788 \begin_inset Flex URL
52791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52793 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52799 \begin_inset Newline newline
52802 For example the format
52803 \begin_inset Newline newline
52807 \begin_inset Newline newline
52810 prints the date as day/month/year.
52815 \begin_layout Description
52817 \begin_inset space ~
52821 \begin_inset space ~
52824 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52825 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52828 \begin_layout Subsection
52834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52836 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52841 \begin_inset Index idx
52844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52845 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52854 \begin_layout Description
52856 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52858 \begin_inset space ~
52866 \begin_inset space ~
52870 \begin_inset space ~
52873 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52878 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52899 are used for Cyrillic.
52900 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52913 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52915 sets up in the background.
52916 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52921 \begin_layout Description
52923 \begin_inset space ~
52927 \begin_inset space ~
52931 \begin_inset space ~
52935 \begin_inset space ~
52938 options They only have an effect when the program
52942 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52945 \begin_layout Standard
52946 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52947 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52948 manuals of the applications.
52951 \begin_layout Description
52953 \begin_inset space ~
52956 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52957 \begin_inset space ~
52961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52963 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52970 \begin_layout Description
52972 \begin_inset space ~
52975 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52976 \begin_inset space ~
52980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52982 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52989 \begin_layout Description
52991 \begin_inset space ~
52994 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52995 \begin_inset space ~
52999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53001 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
53008 \begin_layout Description
53014 \begin_inset space ~
53017 command Command for the program
53019 Check\SpecialChar TeX
53022 that is described in the section
53024 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
53029 Additional Features
53034 \begin_layout Standard
53035 There are additionally the following options:
53038 \begin_layout Description
53040 \begin_inset space ~
53044 \begin_inset space ~
53048 \begin_inset space ~
53052 \begin_inset space ~
53057 \begin_inset space ~
53060 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
53061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53078 to separate folders.
53079 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
53081 \begin_inset Index idx
53084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53091 \begin_inset Index idx
53094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53103 \begin_layout Description
53105 \begin_inset space ~
53109 \begin_inset space ~
53113 \begin_inset space ~
53117 \begin_inset space ~
53121 \begin_inset space ~
53125 \begin_inset space ~
53128 changes Removes all manually set
53134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53135 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53137 \begin_inset space ~
53142 dialog when changing the document class.
53145 \begin_layout Section
53147 \begin_inset space ~
53151 \begin_inset Index idx
53154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53163 \begin_layout Subsection
53165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53167 name "subsec:Converters"
53172 \begin_inset Index idx
53175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53184 \begin_layout Standard
53185 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
53186 from one format to another.
53187 You can modify converters or create new ones.
53188 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
53195 \begin_inset space ~
53200 field and press the
53205 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
53209 \begin_inset space ~
53214 drop-down list, modify the
53218 field and press the
53225 \begin_layout Standard
53228 Converter File Cache
53234 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
53236 Maximum Age (in days
53239 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
53240 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
53243 \begin_layout Standard
53244 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
53245 definition, is described in the section
53256 \begin_layout Subsection
53258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53260 name "sec:File-Formats"
53265 \begin_inset Index idx
53268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53275 \begin_inset Index idx
53278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53287 \begin_layout Standard
53288 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
53298 programs that should be used for certain formats.
53301 \begin_layout Standard
53302 You can also define the
53304 Default output format
53306 that is used when you use
53308 View, Update, View Master Document
53312 Update Master Document
53318 menu or the toolbar.
53321 \begin_layout Standard
53322 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53333 \begin_layout Standard
53334 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53336 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53337 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53338 This is done by specifying a
53343 More about this is described in the section
53354 \begin_layout Chapter
53355 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53357 \begin_inset Index idx
53360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53369 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53376 \begin_layout Standard
53378 \begin_inset space ~
53382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53384 reference "tab:Units"
53388 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53389 and used in this documentation.
53392 \begin_layout Standard
53393 \begin_inset Float table
53400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53419 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53427 \begin_inset Tabular
53428 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
53429 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
53430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53431 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
53432 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53585 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
53589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53856 scaled point (65536
53857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53924 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54048 % of original image width
54053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54137 \begin_layout Standard
54138 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54141 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
54148 \begin_layout Bibliography
54149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54150 LatexCommand bibitem
54157 The \SpecialChar LyX
54159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54162 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
54168 \begin_inset Newline newline
54172 \begin_inset Flex URL
54175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54177 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
54185 \begin_layout Bibliography
54186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54187 LatexCommand bibitem
54188 key "latexcompanion"
54193 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
54195 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54196 Companion Second Edition.
54199 Addison-Wesley, 2004
54202 \begin_layout Bibliography
54203 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54204 LatexCommand bibitem
54210 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
54213 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54217 Addison-Wesley, 2003
54220 \begin_layout Bibliography
54221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54222 LatexCommand bibitem
54231 : A Document Preparation System.
54234 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
54237 \begin_layout Bibliography
54238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54239 LatexCommand bibitem
54249 The \SpecialChar TeX
54253 Addison-Wesley, 1984
54256 \begin_layout Bibliography
54257 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54258 LatexCommand bibitem
54264 The \SpecialChar TeX
54266 \begin_inset Newline newline
54270 \begin_inset Flex URL
54273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54275 https://ctan.org/topic
54283 \begin_layout Bibliography
54284 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54285 LatexCommand bibitem
54291 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54293 \begin_inset Newline newline
54297 \begin_inset Flex URL
54300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54302 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54310 \begin_layout Bibliography
54311 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54312 LatexCommand bibitem
54319 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54321 name "Documentation"
54322 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54329 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54333 \begin_inset Newline newline
54337 \begin_inset Flex URL
54340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54342 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54350 \begin_layout Bibliography
54351 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54352 LatexCommand bibitem
54359 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54361 name "Documentation"
54362 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54367 how to use the program
54369 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54373 \begin_inset Newline newline
54377 \begin_inset Flex URL
54380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54382 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54390 \begin_layout Bibliography
54391 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54392 LatexCommand bibitem
54399 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54401 name "Documentation"
54402 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54407 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54413 \begin_inset Index idx
54416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54418 packages ! biblatex
54424 \begin_inset Newline newline
54428 \begin_inset Flex URL
54431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54433 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
54441 \begin_layout Bibliography
54442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54443 LatexCommand bibitem
54450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54452 name "Documentation"
54453 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
54458 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54464 \begin_inset Index idx
54467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54475 \begin_inset Newline newline
54479 \begin_inset Flex URL
54482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54484 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
54492 \begin_layout Bibliography
54493 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54494 LatexCommand bibitem
54501 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54503 name "Documentation"
54504 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
54514 \begin_inset Newline newline
54518 \begin_inset Flex URL
54521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54523 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54531 \begin_layout Bibliography
54532 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54533 LatexCommand bibitem
54534 key "makeindex-man"
54540 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54543 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54553 \begin_inset Newline newline
54557 \begin_inset Flex URL
54560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54562 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54570 \begin_layout Bibliography
54571 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54572 LatexCommand bibitem
54579 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54581 name "Documentation"
54582 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54592 \begin_inset Newline newline
54596 \begin_inset Flex URL
54599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54601 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54609 \begin_layout Bibliography
54610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54611 LatexCommand bibitem
54618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54620 name "Documentation"
54621 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54626 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54628 \begin_inset Newline newline
54632 \begin_inset Flex URL
54635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54637 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54645 \begin_layout Bibliography
54646 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54647 LatexCommand bibitem
54654 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54656 name "Documentation"
54657 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54662 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54668 \begin_inset Index idx
54671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54679 \begin_inset Newline newline
54683 \begin_inset Flex URL
54686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54688 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54696 \begin_layout Bibliography
54697 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54698 LatexCommand bibitem
54705 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54707 name "Documentation"
54708 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54713 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54719 \begin_inset Index idx
54722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54724 packages ! enumitem
54730 \begin_inset Newline newline
54734 \begin_inset Flex URL
54737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54739 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54747 \begin_layout Bibliography
54748 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54749 LatexCommand bibitem
54756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54758 name "Documentation"
54759 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54764 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54770 \begin_inset Index idx
54773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54775 packages ! fancyhdr
54781 \begin_inset Newline newline
54785 \begin_inset Flex URL
54788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54790 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54798 \begin_layout Bibliography
54799 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54800 LatexCommand bibitem
54807 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54809 name "Documentation"
54810 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54815 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54821 \begin_inset Index idx
54824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54826 packages ! hyperref
54832 \begin_inset Newline newline
54836 \begin_inset Flex URL
54839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54841 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54849 \begin_layout Bibliography
54850 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54851 LatexCommand bibitem
54858 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54860 name "Documentation"
54861 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54866 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54872 \begin_inset Index idx
54875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54877 packages ! microtype
54883 \begin_inset Newline newline
54887 \begin_inset Flex URL
54890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54892 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54900 \begin_layout Bibliography
54901 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54902 LatexCommand bibitem
54909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54911 name "Documentation"
54912 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54917 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54923 \begin_inset Index idx
54926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54934 \begin_inset Newline newline
54938 \begin_inset Flex URL
54941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54943 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54951 \begin_layout Bibliography
54952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54953 LatexCommand bibitem
54960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54962 name "Documentation"
54963 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54968 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54974 \begin_inset Index idx
54977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54979 packages ! prettyref
54985 \begin_inset Newline newline
54989 \begin_inset Flex URL
54992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54994 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
55002 \begin_layout Bibliography
55003 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55004 LatexCommand bibitem
55011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55013 name "Documentation"
55014 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
55019 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55025 \begin_inset Index idx
55028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55030 packages ! refstyle
55036 \begin_inset Newline newline
55040 \begin_inset Flex URL
55043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55045 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
55053 \begin_layout Bibliography
55054 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55055 LatexCommand bibitem
55062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55065 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
55070 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55072 \begin_inset Newline newline
55076 \begin_inset Flex URL
55079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55081 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
55089 \begin_layout Bibliography
55090 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55091 LatexCommand bibitem
55098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55101 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
55106 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55108 \begin_inset Newline newline
55112 \begin_inset Flex URL
55115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55117 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
55125 \begin_layout Bibliography
55126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55127 LatexCommand bibitem
55134 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55137 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
55142 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55143 for Cyrillic languages:
55144 \begin_inset Newline newline
55148 \begin_inset Flex URL
55151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55153 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
55161 \begin_layout Bibliography
55162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55163 LatexCommand bibitem
55170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55173 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
55178 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55180 \begin_inset Newline newline
55184 \begin_inset Flex URL
55187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55189 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
55197 \begin_layout Bibliography
55198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55199 LatexCommand bibitem
55206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55209 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
55214 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55216 \begin_inset Newline newline
55220 \begin_inset Flex URL
55223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55225 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
55233 \begin_layout Bibliography
55234 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55235 LatexCommand bibitem
55242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55245 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
55250 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55252 \begin_inset Newline newline
55256 \begin_inset Flex URL
55259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55261 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
55269 \begin_layout Standard
55270 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55304 \begin_inset Note Note
55307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55314 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55315 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55316 bibliography is the second one:
55324 \begin_layout Standard
55325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55326 LatexCommand bibtex
55327 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55328 options "biblio/alphadin"
55335 \begin_layout Standard
55336 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55340 \begin_layout Standard
55344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55350 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55359 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55367 \begin_inset Note Note
55370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55371 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55372 \begin_inset space ~
55376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55378 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55390 \begin_layout Standard
55391 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55392 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55398 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55399 LatexCommand printindex